FCC ID: I88XMG3512-B10A Dual-Band Wireless AC/N VDSL2 Bonding Gateway with USB

Users Guide XMG3512-B10A Dual-Band Wireless AC/N VDSL2 Bonding Gateway with USB Default Login Details LAN IP Address Login Password http://192.168.1.1 admin, user 1234 Version 1.10 Edition 1, 11/2016 Copyright 2016 Zyxel Communications Corporation IMPORTANT!

READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE. KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. This is a Users Guide for a system managing a series of products. Not all products support all features. Menushots and graphics in this book may differ slightly from what you see due to differences in release versions or your computer operating system. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the managed device More Information Go to support.zyxel.com to find other information on the XMG. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 2 Contents Overview Contents Overview Users Guide ......................................................................................................................................14 Introducing the XMG ............................................................................................................................ 15 The Web Configurator ......................................................................................................................... 23 Quick Start ............................................................................................................................................. 30 Tutorials .................................................................................................................................................. 33 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................55 Network Map and Status Screens ...................................................................................................... 56 Broadband ............................................................................................................................................ 61 Wireless ................................................................................................................................................... 83 Home Networking ............................................................................................................................... 110 Routing ................................................................................................................................................. 124 Quality of Service (QoS) .................................................................................................................... 131 Network Address Translation (NAT) ................................................................................................... 149 DNS ....................................................................................................................................................... 165 VLAN Group ........................................................................................................................................ 169 Interface Grouping ............................................................................................................................ 171 USB Service .......................................................................................................................................... 176 Firewall ................................................................................................................................................. 181 MAC Filter ............................................................................................................................................ 188 Parental Control ................................................................................................................................. 190 Scheduler Rule .................................................................................................................................... 195 Certificates .......................................................................................................................................... 197 Log ....................................................................................................................................................... 203 Traffic Status ....................................................................................................................................... 206 ARP Table ............................................................................................................................................ 209 Routing Table ...................................................................................................................................... 211 Multicast Status .................................................................................................................................. 213 xDSL Statistics ....................................................................................................................................... 215 System .................................................................................................................................................. 217 User Account ...................................................................................................................................... 218 Remote Management ....................................................................................................................... 220 SNMP .................................................................................................................................................... 223 Time Settings ........................................................................................................................................ 225 E-mail Notification .............................................................................................................................. 227 Log Setting .......................................................................................................................................... 229 Firmware Upgrade .............................................................................................................................. 232 Backup/Restore .................................................................................................................................. 234 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 3 Contents Overview Diagnostic ........................................................................................................................................... 237 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................. 242 Appendices .....................................................................................................................................248 Index .................................................................................................................................................... 281 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 4 Table of Contents Table of Contents Contents Overview .............................................................................................................................3 Table of Contents.................................................................................................................................5 Part I: Users Guide.......................................................................................... 14 Chapter 1 Introducing the XMG .........................................................................................................................15 1.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 15 1.2 Ways to Manage the XMG ........................................................................................................... 15 1.3 Good Habits for Managing the XMG ........................................................................................... 15 1.4 Applications for the XMG ............................................................................................................. 15 1.4.1 Internet Access ...................................................................................................................... 16 1.4.2 XMGs USB Support ............................................................................................................... 17 1.5 LEDs (Lights) ..................................................................................................................................... 18 1.6 The RESET Button ............................................................................................................................. 20 1.7 Wireless Access ............................................................................................................................... 21 1.7.1 Using the WPS Button ............................................................................................................ 21 1.8 Wall Mounting ................................................................................................................................. 22 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator........................................................................................................................23 2.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 23 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator ....................................................................................... 23 2.2 Web Configurator Layout .............................................................................................................. 25 2.2.1 Title Bar ................................................................................................................................... 25 2.2.2 Navigation Panel .................................................................................................................. 26 Chapter 3 Quick Start ..........................................................................................................................................30 3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 30 3.2 Quick Start Setup ............................................................................................................................ 30 Chapter 4 Tutorials ...............................................................................................................................................33 4.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 33 4.2 Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection ....................................................................................... 33 4.3 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network .......................................................................................... 36 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 5 Table of Contents 4.3.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings ......................................................................... 36 4.3.2 Using WPS ............................................................................................................................... 38 4.3.3 Without WPS ........................................................................................................................... 41 4.4 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups ............................................................................................. 42 4.5 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network ........................................................ 45 4.6 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup ................................................................................... 47 4.7 Access the XMG Using DDNS ........................................................................................................ 51 4.7.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org ........................................................... 51 4.7.2 Configuring DDNS on Your XMG ......................................................................................... 51 4.7.3 Testing the DDNS Setting ...................................................................................................... 52 4.8 Configuring the MAC Address Filter ............................................................................................. 52 4.9 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer ............................................................................... 53 Part II: Technical Reference........................................................................... 55 Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens ....................................................................................................56 5.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 56 5.2 The Network Map Screen .............................................................................................................. 56 5.3 The Status Screen ........................................................................................................................... 58 Chapter 6 Broadband..........................................................................................................................................61 6.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 61 6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ....................................................................................... 61 6.1.2 What You Need to Know ..................................................................................................... 62 6.1.3 Before You Begin ................................................................................................................... 64 6.2 The Broadband Screen .................................................................................................................. 65 6.2.1 Add/Edit Internet Connection ............................................................................................. 65 6.3 The Advanced Screen ................................................................................................................... 72 6.4 The Ethernet WAN Screen ............................................................................................................. 75 6.5 The 802.1x Screen ........................................................................................................................... 76 6.5.1 Modify 802.1X Settings .......................................................................................................... 77 6.6 Technical Reference ...................................................................................................................... 77 Chapter 7 Wireless ...............................................................................................................................................83 7.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 83 7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ....................................................................................... 83 7.1.2 What You Need to Know ..................................................................................................... 83 7.2 The General Screen ...................................................................................................................... 84 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 6 Table of Contents 7.2.1 No Security ............................................................................................................................. 86 7.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption) ......................................................................................................... 86 7.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) .................................................................................................. 87 7.3 The Guest/More AP Screen ........................................................................................................... 88 7.3.1 Edit Guest/More AP ............................................................................................................. 89 7.4 MAC Authentication ...................................................................................................................... 91 7.5 The WPS Screen .............................................................................................................................. 92 7.6 The WMM Screen ............................................................................................................................ 94 7.7 The Others Screen .......................................................................................................................... 95 7.8 The Channel Status Screen ........................................................................................................... 96 7.9 Technical Reference ...................................................................................................................... 97 7.9.1 Wireless Network Overview .................................................................................................. 97 7.9.2 Additional Wireless Terms ..................................................................................................... 99 7.9.3 Wireless Security Overview ................................................................................................... 99 7.9.4 Signal Problems ................................................................................................................... 101 7.9.5 BSS ......................................................................................................................................... 102 7.9.6 MBSSID .................................................................................................................................. 102 7.9.7 Preamble Type .................................................................................................................... 103 7.9.8 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) ............................................................................................... 103 Chapter 8 Home Networking............................................................................................................................110 8.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 110 8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..................................................................................... 110 8.1.2 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................... 111 8.1.3 Before You Begin ................................................................................................................. 112 8.2 The LAN Setup Screen .................................................................................................................. 112 8.3 The Static DHCP Screen ............................................................................................................... 116 8.4 The UPnP Screen ........................................................................................................................... 117 8.4.1 Turning On UPnP in Windows 7 Example .......................................................................... 118 8.5 The Additional Subnet Screen ..................................................................................................... 120 8.6 The STB Vendor ID Screen ............................................................................................................ 121 8.7 The Wake on LAN Screen ............................................................................................................ 121 8.8 The TFTP Server Name Screen ..................................................................................................... 122 8.9 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................... 122 8.9.1 LANs, WANs and the XMG ................................................................................................. 122 8.9.2 DHCP Setup ......................................................................................................................... 123 8.9.3 DNS Server Addresses ......................................................................................................... 123 Chapter 9 Routing ..............................................................................................................................................124 9.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 124 9.2 The Routing Screen ...................................................................................................................... 124 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 7 Table of Contents 9.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route ......................................................................................................... 125 9.3 The DNS Route Screen ................................................................................................................. 126 9.3.1 The DNS Route Add Screen ............................................................................................... 127 9.4 The Policy Route Screen .............................................................................................................. 127 9.4.1 Add/Edit Policy Route ........................................................................................................ 129 9.5 RIP ............................................................................................................................................... 129 9.5.1 The RIP Screen ..................................................................................................................... 130 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)..................................................................................................................131 10.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 131 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 131 10.2 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................................... 132 10.3 The Quality of Service General Screen ................................................................................... 133 10.4 The Queue Setup Screen ........................................................................................................... 134 10.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue ...................................................................................................... 136 10.5 The Classification Setup Screen ................................................................................................ 137 10.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class .......................................................................................................... 137 10.6 The QoS Shaper Setup Screen .................................................................................................. 141 10.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Shaper ................................................................................................... 142 10.7 The QoS Policer Setup Screen ................................................................................................... 142 10.7.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer ................................................................................................... 143 10.8 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................. 144 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)................................................................................................149 11.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 149 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 149 11.1.2 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 149 11.2 The Port Forwarding Screen ..................................................................................................... 150 11.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding ................................................................................................ 152 11.3 The Applications Screen ............................................................................................................ 153 11.3.1 Add New Application ....................................................................................................... 154 11.4 The Port Triggering Screen ......................................................................................................... 154 11.4.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule .......................................................................................... 156 11.5 The DMZ Screen .......................................................................................................................... 157 11.6 The ALG Screen .......................................................................................................................... 158 11.7 The Address Mapping Screen ................................................................................................... 158 11.7.1 Add/Edit Address Mapping Rule ..................................................................................... 159 11.8 The Sessions Screen .................................................................................................................... 160 11.9 Technical Reference .................................................................................................................. 161 11.9.1 NAT Definitions ................................................................................................................... 161 11.9.2 What NAT Does ................................................................................................................. 161 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 8 Table of Contents 11.9.3 How NAT Works .................................................................................................................. 162 11.9.4 NAT Application ................................................................................................................ 162 Chapter 12 DNS....................................................................................................................................................165 12.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 165 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 165 12.1.2 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 165 12.2 The DNS Entry Screen ................................................................................................................. 166 12.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry ........................................................................................................... 166 12.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen .......................................................................................................... 167 Chapter 13 VLAN Group......................................................................................................................................169 13.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 169 13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 169 13.2 The VLAN Group Screen ............................................................................................................ 169 13.2.1 Add/Edit a VLAN Group ................................................................................................... 170 Chapter 14 Interface Grouping ..........................................................................................................................171 14.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 171 14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 171 14.2 The Interface Grouping Screen ................................................................................................ 171 14.2.1 Interface Group Configuration ....................................................................................... 172 14.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria ............................................................................................ 174 Chapter 15 USB Service .......................................................................................................................................176 15.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 176 15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 176 15.1.2 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 176 15.1.3 Before You Begin ............................................................................................................... 177 15.2 The File Sharing Screen .............................................................................................................. 177 15.2.1 The Add New User Screen ............................................................................................... 178 15.3 The Media Server Screen ........................................................................................................... 179 Chapter 16 Firewall..............................................................................................................................................181 16.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 181 16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 181 16.1.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................. 182 16.2 The Firewall Screen ..................................................................................................................... 182 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 9 Table of Contents 16.3 The Protocol Screen .................................................................................................................. 183 16.3.1 Add/Edit a Service ........................................................................................................... 184 16.4 The Access Control Screen ....................................................................................................... 185 16.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule ..................................................................................................... 185 16.5 The DoS Screen ........................................................................................................................... 187 Chapter 17 MAC Filter .........................................................................................................................................188 17.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 188 17.2 The MAC Filter Screen ................................................................................................................ 188 Chapter 18 Parental Control ...............................................................................................................................190 18.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 190 18.2 The Parental Control Screen ..................................................................................................... 190 18.2.1 Add/Edit a Parental Control Profile ................................................................................ 191 Chapter 19 Scheduler Rule .................................................................................................................................195 19.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 195 19.2 The Scheduler Rule Screen ........................................................................................................ 195 19.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule ........................................................................................................ 195 Chapter 20 Certificates .......................................................................................................................................197 20.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 197 20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 197 20.2 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................................... 197 20.3 The Local Certificates Screen ................................................................................................... 197 20.3.1 Create Certificate Request ............................................................................................ 198 20.3.2 Load Signed Certificate .................................................................................................. 199 20.4 The Trusted CA Screen ............................................................................................................... 200 20.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate ............................................................................................ 201 20.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate .......................................................................................... 202 Chapter 21 Log ....................................................................................................................................................203 21.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 203 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 203 21.1.2 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 203 21.2 The System Log Screen .............................................................................................................. 204 21.3 The Security Log Screen ............................................................................................................. 204 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 10 Table of Contents Chapter 22 Traffic Status .....................................................................................................................................206 22.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 206 22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 206 22.2 The WAN Status Screen .............................................................................................................. 206 22.3 The LAN Status Screen ............................................................................................................... 207 22.4 The NAT Status Screen ................................................................................................................ 208 Chapter 23 ARP Table..........................................................................................................................................209 23.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 209 23.1.1 How ARP Works .................................................................................................................. 209 23.2 ARP Table Screen ....................................................................................................................... 209 Chapter 24 Routing Table....................................................................................................................................211 24.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 211 24.2 The Routing Table Screen .......................................................................................................... 211 Chapter 25 Multicast Status ...............................................................................................................................213 25.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 213 25.2 The IGMP Status Screen ............................................................................................................. 213 25.3 The MLD Status Screen ............................................................................................................... 213 Chapter 26 xDSL Statistics ...................................................................................................................................215 26.1 The xDSL Statistics Screen .......................................................................................................... 215 Chapter 27 System...............................................................................................................................................217 27.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 217 27.2 The System Screen ...................................................................................................................... 217 Chapter 28 User Account....................................................................................................................................218 28.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 218 28.2 The User Account Screen .......................................................................................................... 218 28.2.1 The User Account Add/Edit Screen ................................................................................ 218 Chapter 29 Remote Management.....................................................................................................................220 29.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 220 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 11 Table of Contents 29.2 The MGMT Services Screen ....................................................................................................... 220 29.3 The Trust Domain Screen ............................................................................................................ 221 29.3.1 The Add Trust Domain Screen ......................................................................................... 221 Chapter 30 SNMP .................................................................................................................................................223 30.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 223 30.2 The SNMP Screen ........................................................................................................................ 223 Chapter 31 Time Settings.....................................................................................................................................225 31.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 225 31.2 The Time Screen ......................................................................................................................... 225 Chapter 32 E-mail Notification ...........................................................................................................................227 32.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 227 32.2 The E-mail Notification Screen .................................................................................................. 227 32.2.1 E-mail Notification Edit .................................................................................................... 227 Chapter 33 Log Setting .......................................................................................................................................229 33.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 229 33.2 The Log Settings Screen ............................................................................................................. 229 33.2.1 Example E-mail Log ........................................................................................................... 230 Chapter 34 Firmware Upgrade ...........................................................................................................................232 34.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 232 34.2 The Firmware Screen .................................................................................................................. 232 Chapter 35 Backup/Restore ...............................................................................................................................234 35.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 234 35.2 The Backup/Restore Screen ...................................................................................................... 234 35.3 The Reboot Screen ..................................................................................................................... 236 Chapter 36 Diagnostic.........................................................................................................................................237 36.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 237 36.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ................................................................................... 237 36.2 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................................... 237 36.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup ................................................................................................ 238 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 12 Table of Contents 36.4 802.1ag ........................................................................................................................................ 238 36.5 OAM Ping .................................................................................................................................... 239 Chapter 37 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................242 37.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ............................................................................... 242 37.2 XMG Access and Login ............................................................................................................. 243 37.3 Internet Access ........................................................................................................................... 244 37.4 Wireless Internet Access ............................................................................................................. 246 37.5 USB Device Connection ............................................................................................................ 247 37.6 UPnP ............................................................................................................................................. 247 Part III: Appendices...................................................................................... 248 Appendix A Customer Support ..................................................................................................... 249 Appendix B Wireless LANs............................................................................................................... 255 Appendix C Services....................................................................................................................... 268 Appendix D Legal Information ...................................................................................................... 272 Index .................................................................................................................................................281 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 13 PART I Users Guide 14 CHAPTER 1 Introducing the XMG 1.1 Overview The XMG is an ADSL/VDSL2 bonding and high-performance wireless gateway that provides ultra-speed VDSL Internet access for triple-play services and optimized HD IPTV services at home or office. This model offers a Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) WAN with an interface using Small Form Factor Pluggable (SFP), Ethernet or DSL port. The XMG offers 2.4G and 5G Wi-Fi networks that operate simultaneously, providing a simple and unified network management. The XMG has one USB port for sharing files via a USB storage device. The XMG is also backward compatible with ADSL, ADSL2 and ADSL2+. Only use firmware for your XMGs specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your XMG. 1.2 Ways to Manage the XMG Use any of the following methods to manage the XMG. Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the XMG using a (supported) web browser. 1.3 Good Habits for Managing the XMG Do the following things regularly to make the XMG more secure and to manage the XMG more effectively. Change the password. Use a password thats not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters. Write down the password and put it in a safe place. Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the XMG to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the XMG. You could simply restore your last configuration. 1.4 Applications for the XMG Here are some example uses for which the XMG is well suited. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 15 Chapter 1 Introducing the XMG 1.4.1 Internet Access Computers can connect to the XMGs LAN ports (or wirelessly). You can also configure IP filtering on the XMG for secure Internet access. When the IP filter is on, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked by default unless it is initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files. 1.4.1.1 DSL Your XMG provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack. You can have multiple WAN services over one ADSL or VDSL. The XMG cannot work in ADSL and VDSL mode at the same time. Note: The ADSL and VDSL lines share the same WAN (layer-2) interfaces that you configure in the XMG. Refer to Section 6.2 on page 65 for the Network Setting > Broadband screen. Figure 1 XMGs Internet Access Application WLAN LAN WLAN LAN WAN WAN Bridging IPoE PPPoE ADSL / VDSL Bridging PPPoE IPoE PPPoA IPoA ADSL A A 1.4.1.2 Ethernet WAN If you prefer not to use a DSL line and you have another broadband modem or router (such as ADSL) available, you can convert LAN port number four as a WAN port using the Network Setting > Broadband

> Ethernet WAN screen and then connect the LAN port to the broadband modem or router. This way, you can access the Internet via an Ethernet connection and still use the QoS, Firewall and parental control functions on the XMG. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 16 Chapter 1 Introducing the XMG Figure 2 XMGs Internet Access Application: Ethernet WAN WLAN LAN 1.4.1.3 SFP WAN Ethernet WAN If you prefer not to use the Ethernet or DSL line, your XMG also provides shared Internet access by connecting the Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) transceiver. SFP is also known as Fiber Optics interface. The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) WAN with SFP is a dual-personality design (GbE + Fiber) which enables increased bandwidth and extended coverage. The XMG supports multiple VLANs over the SFP WAN interface for triple play. To connect the SFP port use a Fiber Optic Module, also known as a mini-

GBIC transceiver, to a Switch or Router. Figure 3 XMGs Internet Access Application: Ethernet WAN WLAN LAN WAN SFP WAN Note: You can only have Internet access through one of the ports (DSL, Ethernet or SFP) at a time. Your XMG has WAN priority, and if you connect all ports simultaneously to a successful internet access, only one WAN port interface will be active. The XMG will prioritize SFP, then Ethernet, and last DSL. 1.4.2 XMGs USB Support The USB port of the XMG is used for file-sharing and media server. File Sharing Use the built-in USB 2.0 port to share files on a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive (B). You can connect one USB hard drive to the XMG at a time. Use FTP to access the files on the USB device. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 17 Chapter 1 Introducing the XMG Figure 4 USB File Sharing Application B Media Server A You can also use the XMG as a media server. This lets anyone on your network play video, music, and photos from a USB device (B) connected to the XMGs USB port (without having to copy them to another computer). Figure 5 USB Media Server Application B A 1.5 LEDs (Lights) The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 18 Chapter 1 Introducing the XMG Figure 6 LEDs on the XMG None of the LEDs are on if the XMG is not receiving power. Table 1 LED Descriptions LED COLOR Green Power DSL1 DSL2 SFP Red Green Amber Green STATUS On Blinking On Blinking Off On Blinking On Blinking Off On Blinking Off DESCRIPTION The XMG is receiving power and ready for use. The XMG is self-testing. The XMG detected an error while self-testing, or there is a device malfunction. The XMG is upgrading its firmware. The XMG is not receiving power. The ADSL line is up. The XMG is initializing the ADSL line. The VDSL line is up. The XMG is initializing the VDSL line. The DSL line is down. The XMG has a successful connection on the WAN. The XMG is sending or receiving data to/from the WAN. The XMG does not detect a SFP connection to the WAN. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 19 Chapter 1 Introducing the XMG Table 1 LED Descriptions (continued) LED COLOR Green STATUS On DESCRIPTION The XMG has an IP connection but no traffic. Internet WAN Ethernet 1~4 USB WiFi 2.4G WiFi 5G WPS Blinking Off On Red Green On Blinking Green Off On Green Green Amber Green Amber Amber Blinking Off On Blinking Off On Blinking Blinking Off On Blinking Blinking Off On Off Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a DHCP server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used) and the DSL connection is up. The XMG is sending or receiving IP traffic. There is no Internet connection or the gateway is in bridged mode. The XMG attempted to make an IP connection but failed. Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server, no PPPoE response, PPPoE authentication failed. The XMG has a successful 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet connection on the WAN. The XMG is sending or receiving data to/from the WAN at 10/100/1000 Mbps. There is no Ethernet connection on the WAN. The XMG has a successful 1000 Mbps Ethernet connection with a device on the Local Area Network (LAN). The XMG is sending or receiving data to/from the LAN at 1000 Mbps. The XMG does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN. The XMG recognizes a USB connection through the USB slot. The XMG is sending/receiving data to /from the USB device connected to it. The XMG does not detect a USB connection through the USB slot. The 2.4 GHz wireless network is activated. The XMG is communicating with 2.4 GHz wireless clients. The XMG is setting up a WPS connection with a 2.4 GHz wireless client. The 2.4 GHz wireless network is not activated. The 5 GHz wireless network is activated. The XMG is communicating with 5 GHz wireless clients. The XMG is setting up a WPS connection with a 5 GHz wireless client. The 5 GHz wireless network is not activated. The 2.4 Ghz or 5 GHz wireless network and WPS are enabled. Both 2.4 Ghz or 5 GHz wireless network and WPS are disabled. 1.6 The RESET Button If you forget your password or cannot access the Web Configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to 1234. 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking). XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 20 Chapter 1 Introducing the XMG 2 To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for five seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it. When the POWER LED begins to blink, the defaults have been restored and the device restarts. 1.7 Wireless Access The XMG is a wireless Access Point (AP) for wireless clients, such as notebook computers or PDAs and iPads. It allows them to connect to the Internet without having to rely on inconvenient Ethernet cables. You can configure your wireless network in either the built-in Web Configurator, or using the WPS button. Figure 7 Wireless Access Example 1.7.1 Using the WPS Button Once the WiFi LED turns green, the wireless network is active. If the wireless network is turned off, see Section 7.2 on page 84 for how to enable the wireless network on the XMG. You can also use the WPS button to quickly set up a secure wireless connection between the XMG and a WPS-compatible client by adding one device at a time. To activate WPS:

1 Make sure the POWER LED is on and not blinking. 2 3 Press the WPS button for five seconds and release it. Press the WPS button on another WPS-enabled device within range of the XMG. The WiFi LED flashes orange while the XMG sets up a WPS connection with the other wireless device. 4 Once the connection is successfully made, the WPS LED shines green. The WPS LED turns off when the wireless network is off. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 21 Chapter 1 Introducing the XMG 1.8 Wall Mounting You may need screw anchors if mounting on a concrete or brick wall. Table 2 Wall Mounting Information Distance between holes M4 Screws Screw anchors (optional) 90 mm Two Two 5 Select a position free of obstructions on a wall strong enough to hold the weight of the device. 6 Mark two holes on the wall at the appropriate distance apart for the screws. Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the wall when drilling holes for the screws. 7 If using screw anchors, drill two holes for the screw anchors into the wall. Push the anchors into the full depth of the holes, then insert the screws into the anchors. Do not insert the screws all the way in - leave a small gap of about 0.5 cm. If not using screw anchors, use a screwdriver to insert the screws into the wall. Do not insert the screws all the way in - leave a gap of about 0.5 cm. 8 Make sure the screws are fastened well enough to hold the weight of the XMG with the connection cables. 9 Align the holes on the back of the XMG with the screws on the wall. Hang the XMG on the screws. Figure 8 Wall Mounting Example XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 22 CHAPTER 2 The Web Configurator 2.1 Overview The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy XMG setup and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 8.0 and later versions or Mozilla Firefox 3 and later versions or Safari 2.0 and later versions.* The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels. In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:

Web browser pop-up windows from your XMG. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2. JavaScript (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator 1 Make sure your XMG hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick Start Guide). 2 Launch your web browser. If the XMG does not automatically re-direct you to the login screen, go to http://192.168.1.1. 3 A password screen displays. To access the administrative web configurator and manage the XMG, type the default username admin/user and password 1234 in the password screen and click Login. If you have changed the password, enter your password and click Login. Figure 9 4 The following screen displays if you have not yet changed your password. Enter a new password, retype it to confirm and click Apply. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 23 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Figure 10 5 The Quick Start Wizard screen appears. You can configure basic Internet access, and wireless settings. See Chapter 3 on page 30 for more information. 6 After you finished or closed the Quick Start Wizard screen, the Network Map page appears. Figure 11 7 Click Status to display the Status screen, where you can view the XMGs interface and system information. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 24 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator 2.2 Web Configurator Layout A Figure 12 B C As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:

A - title bar B - main window C - navigation panel 2.2.1 Title Bar The title bar provides some icons in the upper right corner. The icons provide the following functions. Table 3 Web Configurator Icons in the Title Bar ICON DESCRIPTION Language: Select the language you prefer. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 25 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Table 3 Web Configurator Icons in the Title Bar ICON DESCRIPTION Quick Start: Click this icon to open screens where you can configure the XMGs time zone Internet access, and wireless settings. Logout: Click this icon to log out of the web configurator. 2.2.2 Navigation Panel Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure XMG features. The following tables describe each menu item. Table 4 Navigation Panel Summary LINK Connection Status TAB Network Setting Broadband Broadband Advanced Ethernet WAN 802.1x Wireless General Guest/More AP MAC Authentication WPS WMM Others Channel Status LAN Setup Static DHCP UPnP Additional Subnet STB Vendor ID Home Networking FUNCTION This screen shows the network status of the XMG and computers/devices connected to it. Use this screen to view and configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address assignment, and other advanced properties. You can also add new WAN connections. Use this screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL, Annex M/Annex J, and DSL PhyR functions. Use this screen to enable the fourth Ethernet LAN port to be an Ethernet WAN port. Use this screen to view and configure the IEEE 802.1x settings on the XMG. Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN authentication/security settings. Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the XMG. Use this screen to block or allow wireless traffic from wireless devices of certain SSIDs and MAC addresses to the XMG. Use this screen to configure and view your WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) settings. Use this screen to enable or disable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM). Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings. Use this screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results. Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP settings, and other advanced properties. Use this screen to assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses. Use this screen to turn UPnP and UPnP NAT-T on or off. Use this screen to configure IP alias and public static IP. Use this screen to configure the Vendor IDs of the connected Set Top Box

(STB) devices, which have the XMG automatically create static DHCP entries for the STB devices when they request IP addresses. Use this screen to remotely turn on a device on the local network. Wake on LAN TFTP Server Name Configure a TFTP server name which is sent to clients using DHCP option 66. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 26 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Routing TAB Static Route DNS Route Table 4 Navigation Panel Summary (continued) LINK FUNCTION Use this screen to view and set up static routes on the XMG. Use this screen to forward DNS queries for certain domain names through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server(s). Use this screen to configure policy routing on the XMG. Use this screen to configure Routing Information Protocol to exchange routing information with other routers. Use this screen to enable QoS and traffic prioritizing. You can also configure the QoS rules and actions. Use this screen to configure QoS queues. Use this screen to define a classifier. Policy Route RIP General QoS NAT DNS Vlan Group Interface Grouping USB Service Security Firewall Queue Setup Classification Setup Shaper Setup Policer Setup Port Forwarding Applications Port Triggering DMZ DNS Entry Dynamic DNS Vlan Group Interface Grouping File Sharing Media Server General Protocol Access Control DoS MAC Filter MAC Filter Parental Control Scheduler Rules Parental Control Scheduler Rules Use this screen to limit outgoing traffic rate on the selected interface. Use this screen to configure QoS policers. Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world. Use this screen to configure servers behind the XMG. Use this screen to change your XMGs port triggering settings. Use this screen to configure a default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding screen. Use this screen to enable or disable SIP ALG. ALG Address Mapping Use this screen to change your XMGs address mapping settings. Sessions Use this screen to configure the maximum number of NAT sessions each client host is allowed to have through the XMG. Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes. Use this screen to allow a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address. Use this screen to group and tag VLAN IDs to outgoing traffic from the specified interface. Use this screen to map a port to a PVC or bridge group. Use this screen to enable file sharing via the XMG. Use this screen to use the XMG as a media server. Use this screen to configure the security level of your firewall. Use this screen to add Internet services and configure firewall rules. Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network services. Use this screen to activate protection against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. Use this screen to block or allow traffic from devices of certain MAC addresses to the XMG. Use this screen to block web sites with the specific URL. Use this screen to configure the days and times when a configured restriction (such as parental control) is enforced. Certificates Local Certificates Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates and manage Trusted CA certificates and certification requests. Use this screen to view and manage the list of the trusted CAs. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 27 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator Table 4 Navigation Panel Summary (continued) FUNCTION LINK System Monitor TAB Log System Log Security Log Use this screen to view the status of events that occurred to the XMG. You can export or e-mail the logs. Use this screen to view all security related events. You can select level and category of the security events in their proper drop-down list window. Levels include:

Emergency Alert Critical Error Warning Notice Informational Debugging Categories include:

Account Attack Firewall MAC Filter Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the WAN port of the XMG. Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the LAN ports of the XMG. Use this screen to view NAT statistics for connected hosts. Use this screen to view the ARP table. It displays the IP and MAC address of each DHCP connection. Use this screen to view the routing table on the XMG. Use this screen to view the status of all IGMP settings on the XMG. Use this screen to view the status of all MLD settings on the XMG. Use this screen to view the XMGs xDSL traffic statistics. Use this screen to set Device name and Domain name. Use this screen to change user password on the XMG. Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network services. Use this screen to view a list of public IP addresses which are allowed to access the XMG through the services configured in the Maintenance >

Remote Management screen. Use this screen to configure SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) settings. Use this screen to change your XMGs time and date. Use this screen to configure up to two mail servers and sender addresses on the XMG. Use this screen to change your XMGs log settings. Use this screen to upload firmware to your XMG. Traffic Status WAN LAN NAT ARP table Routing Table IGMP Status MLD Status xDSL Statistics ARP table Routing Table Multicast Status xDSL Statistics Maintenance System System User Account Remote Management User Account MGMT Services Trust Domain SNMP SNMP Time E-mail Notification Log Setting Firmware Upgrade Time E-mail Notification Log Setting Firmware Upgrade XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 28 Chapter 2 The Web Configurator TAB Reboot Diagnostic Backup/Restore Backup/Restore Table 4 Navigation Panel Summary (continued) LINK FUNCTION Use this screen to backup and restore your XMGs configuration

(settings) or reset the factory default settings. Use this screen to reboot the XMG without turning the power off. Use this screen to identify problems with the DSL connection. You can use Ping, TraceRoute, or Nslookup to help you identify problems. Use this screen to configure CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) MD

(maintenance domain) and MA (maintenance association), perform connectivity tests and view test reports. Use this screen to view information to help you identify problems with the DSL connection. Reboot Ping&Traceroute

&Nslookup 802.1ag OAM Ping XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 29 CHAPTER 3 Quick Start 3.1 Overview Use the Quick Start screens to configure the XMGs time zone, basic Internet access, and wireless settings. Note: See the technical reference chapters (starting on Chapter 4 on page 33) for background information on the features in this chapter. 3.2 Quick Start Setup 1 The Quick Start Wizard appears automatically after login. Or you can click the Quick Start icon in the top right corner of the web configurator to open the quick start screens. Select the time zone of your location. Click Next. Figure 13 Quick Start - Welcome 2 Enter your Internet connection information in this screen. The screen and fields to enter may vary depending on your current connection type. Click Next. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 30 Chapter 3 Quick Start Figure 14 Quick Start - Internet Connection 3 Turn the wireless LAN on or off. If you keep it on, record the security settings so you can configure your wireless clients to connect to the XMG. Click Save. Figure 15 Quick Start - Wireless Setting 4 Your XMG saves your settings and attempts to connect to the Internet. Click Close to complete the setup. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 31 Chapter 3 Quick Start Figure 16 Quick Start - Result Summary XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 32 CHAPTER 4 Tutorials 4.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to use the XMGs various features. Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection, see page 33 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network, see page 36 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups, see page 42 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network, see page 45 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup, see page 47 Access the XMG Using DDNS, see page 51 Configuring the MAC Address Filter, see page 52 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer, see page 53 4.2 Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection This tutorial shows you how to set up an ADSL Internet connection using the Web Configurator. If you connect to the Internet through an ADSL connection, use the information from your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to configure the XMG. Be sure to contact your service provider for any information you need to configure the Broadband screens. 1 Click Network Setting > Broadband to open the following screen. Click Add New WAN Interface. 2 In this example, the DSL connection has the following information. General Name Type Connection Mode Encapsulation MyDSLConnection ADSL over ATM Routing PPPoE XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 33 Chapter 4 Tutorials IPv6/IPv4 Mode IPv4 ATM PVC Configuration VPI/VCI Encapsulation Mode Service Category Account Information PPP User Name PPP Password PPPoE Service Name Static IP Address Others 36/48 LLC/SNAP-Bridging UBR Without PCR 1234@DSL-Ex.com ABCDEF!

MyDSL 192.168.1.32 Authentication Method: AUTO PPPoE Passthrough: Disabled NAT: Enabled IGMP Multicast Proxy: Enabled Apply as Default Gateway: Enabled VLAN: Disabled 3 Select the Active check box. Enter the General and ATM PVC Configuration settings as provided above. Set the Type to ADSL over ATM. Choose the Encapsulation specified by your DSL service provider. For this example, the service provider requires a username and password to establish Internet connection. Therefore, select PPPoE as the WAN encapsulation type. Set the IPv6/IPv4 Mode to IPv4 Only. 4 Enter the account information provided to you by your DSL service provider. 5 Configure this rule as your default Internet connection by selecting the Apply as Default Gateway check box. Then select DNS as Static and enter the DNS server addresses provided to you, such as 192.168.5.2

(DNS server1)/192.168.5.1 (DNS server2). 6 Leave the rest of the fields to the default settings. 7 Click Apply to save your settings. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 34 Chapter 4 Tutorials 8 You should see a summary of your new DSL connection setup in the Broadband screen as follows. Try to connect to a website to see if you have correctly set up your Internet connection. Be sure to contact your service provider for any information you need to configure the WAN screens. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 35 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4.3 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network Thomas wants to set up a wireless network so that he can use his notebook to access the Internet. In this wireless network, the XMG serves as an access point (AP), and the notebook is the wireless client. The wireless client can access the Internet through the AP. Thomas has to configure the wireless network settings on the XMG. Then he can set up a wireless network using WPS (Section 4.3.2 on page 38) or manual configuration (Section 4.3.3 on page 41). 4.3.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings This example uses the following parameters to set up a wireless network. SSID Security Mode Pre-Shared Key 802.11 Mode Example WPA2-PSK DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork 802.11b/g/n Mixed 1 Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. Select More Secure as the security level and WPA2-PSK as the security mode. Configure the screen using the provided parameters (see page 36). Click Apply. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 36 Chapter 4 Tutorials 2 Go to the Wireless > Others screen and select 802.11b/g/n Mixed in the 802.11 Mode field. Click Apply. Thomas can now use the WPS feature to establish a wireless connection between his notebook and the XMG (see Section 4.3.2 on page 38). He can also use the notebooks wireless client to search for the XMG (see Section 4.3.3 on page 41). XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 37 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4.3.2 Using WPS This section shows you how to set up a wireless network using WPS. It uses the XMG as the AP and Zyxel NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to the notebook. Note: The wireless client must be a WPS-aware device (for example, a WPS USB adapter or PCMCIA card). There are two WPS methods to set up the wireless client settings:

Push Button Configuration (PBC) - simply press a button. This is the easier of the two methods. PIN Configuration - configure a Personal Identification Number (PIN) on the XMG. A wireless client must also use the same PIN in order to download the wireless network settings from the XMG. Push Button Configuration (PBC) 1 Make sure that your XMG is turned on and your notebook is within the cover range of the wireless signal. 2 Make sure that you have installed the wireless client driver and utility in your notebook. 3 4 In the wireless client utility, go to the WPS setting page. Enable WPS and press the WPS button for more than five seconds (Start or WPS button). Push and hold the WPS button located on the XMGs front panel for more than 5 seconds. Alternatively, you may log into XMGs web configurator and go to the Network Setting > Wireless > WPS screen. Enable the WPS function for method 1 and click Apply. Then click the WPS button. 1 3 2 Note: Your XMG has a WPS button located on its front panel as well as a WPS button in its configuration utility. Both buttons have exactly the same function: you can use one or the other. Note: It doesnt matter which button is pressed first. You must press the second button within two minutes of pressing the first one. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 38 Chapter 4 Tutorials The XMG sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the XMG securely. The following figure shows you an example of how to set up a wireless network and its security by pressing a button on both XMG and wireless client. Example WPS Process: PBC MethodZyxel Wireless Client VMG WLAN/

WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES Press and hold for 5 seconds SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION PIN Configuration When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to use both the XMGs web configurator and the wireless clients utility. 1 2 Launch your wireless clients configuration utility. Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method to get a PIN number. Log into XMGs web configurator and go to the Network Setting > Wireless > WPS screen. Enable the WPS function and click Apply. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 39 Chapter 4 Tutorials 1 3 2 3 Enter the PIN number of the wireless client and click the Register button. Activate WPS function on the wireless client utility screen within two minutes. The XMG authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the XMG securely. The following figure shows you how to set up a wireless network and its security on a XMG and a wireless client by using PIN method. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 40 Chapter 4 Tutorials Example WPS Process: PIN Method Wireless Client VMG WITHIN 2 MINUTES Authentication by PIN SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION 4.3.3 Without WPS Use the wireless adapters utility installed on the notebook to search for the Example SSID. Then enter the DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork pre-shared key to establish an wireless Internet connection. Note: The XMG supports IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g wireless clients. Make sure that your notebook or computers wireless adapter supports one of these standards. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 41 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4.4 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups Company A wants to create different wireless network groups for different types of users as shown in the following figure. Each group has its own SSID and security mode. Company VIP Guest Employees in Company A will use a general Company wireless network group. Higher management level and important visitors will use the VIP group. Visiting guests will use the Guest group, which has a different SSID and password. Company A will use the following parameters to set up the wireless network groups. SSID Security Level Security Mode Pre-Shared Key COMPANY Company More Secure WPA2-PSK ForCompanyOnly VIP VIP More Secure WPA2-PSK 123456789 GUEST Guest More Secure WPA2-PSK guest123 1 Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. Use this screen to set up the companys general wireless network group. Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 42 Chapter 4 Tutorials 2 Click Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP to open the following screen. Click the Edit icon to configure the second wireless network group. 3 Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click OK. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 43 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4 In the Guest/More AP screen, click the Edit icon to configure the third wireless network group.Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 44 Chapter 4 Tutorials 5 Check the status of VIP and Guest in the Guest/More AP screen. The yellow bulbs signify that the SSIDs are active and ready for wireless access. 4.5 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions, you may connect a router to the XMGs LAN. The router may be used to separate two department networks. This tutorial shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 45 Chapter 4 Tutorials In the following figure, router R is connected to the XMGs LAN. R connects to two networks, N1

(192.168.1.x/24) and N2 (192.168.10.x/24). If you want to send traffic from computer A (in N1 network) to computer B (in N2 network), the traffic is sent to the XMGs WAN default gateway by default. In this case, B will never receive the traffic. N1 A R N2 B You need to specify a static routing rule on the XMG to specify R as the router in charge of forwarding traffic to N2. In this case, the XMG routes traffic from A to R and then R routes the traffic to B. N1 A R N2 B This tutorial uses the following example IP settings:

Table 5 IP Settings in this Tutorial DEVICE / COMPUTER The XMGs WAN The XMGs LAN IP Type Use Interface A Rs N1 IP ADDRESS 172.16.1.1 192.168.1.1 IPv4 VDSL/ppp1.1 192.168.1.34 192.168.1.253 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 46 Chapter 4 Tutorials Table 5 IP Settings in this Tutorial DEVICE / COMPUTER Rs N2 B IP ADDRESS 192.168.10.2 192.168.10.33 To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2:

1 Log into the XMGs Web Configurator in advanced mode. 2 Click Network Setting > Routing. 3 Click Add new Static Route in the Static Route screen. 4 Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings:

4a 4b 4c 4d Select the Active check box. Enter the Route Name as R. Set IP Type to IPv4. Type 192.168.10.0 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the destination, N2. Select Enable in the Use Gateway IP Address field. Type 192.168.1.253 (Rs N1 address) in the Gateway IP Address field. 4e Select VDSL/ppp1.1 as the Use Interface. 4a Click OK. Now B should be able to receive traffic from A. You may need to additionally configure Bs firewall settings to allow specific traffic to pass through. 4.6 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 47 Chapter 4 Tutorials Lets say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office. You want to prioritize e-mail traffic because your task includes sending urgent updates to clients at least twice every hour. You also upload data files (such as logs and e-mail archives) to the FTP server throughout the day. Your colleagues use the Internet for research, as well as chat applications for communicating with other branch offices. In the following figure, your Internet connection has an upstream transmission bandwidth of 10,000 kbps. For this example, you want to configure QoS so that e-mail traffic gets the highest priority with at least 5,000 kbps. You can do the following:

Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue (1) to e-mail traffic going to the WAN interface, so that e-mail traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion. Note the IP address (192.168.1.23 for example) and/or MAC address (AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF for example) of your computer and map it to queue 7. Note: QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the XMG. Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on the XMG. QoS Example DSL 10,000 kbps Your computer IP=192.168.1.23 and/or MAC=AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF Email traffic: Highest priority A colleagues computer Other traffic: Automatic classifier 1 Click Network Setting > QoS > General and select Enable. Set your WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth to 10,000 kbps (or leave this blank to have the XMG automatically determine this figure). Click Apply. Tutorial: Advanced > QoS 2 Click Queue Setup > Add new Queue to create a new queue. In the screen that opens, check Active and enter or select the following values:

Name: E-mail Interface: WAN XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 48 Chapter 4 Tutorials Priority: 1 (High) Weight: 8 Rate Limit: 5,000 (kbps) Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup 3 Click Classification Setup > Add new Classification to create a new class. Check Active and follow the settings as shown in the screen below. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 49 Chapter 4 Tutorials Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Class Setup Class Name From Interface Ether Type IP Address MAC Address To Queue Index Give a class name to this traffic, such as E-mail in this example. This is the interface from which the traffic will be coming from. Select LAN1 for this example. Select IP to identify the traffic source by its IP address or MAC address. Type the IP address of your computer - 192.168.1.23. Type the IP Subnet Mask if you know it. Type the MAC address of your computer - AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF. Type the MAC Mask if you know it. Link this to an item in the Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup screen, which is the E-mail queue created in this example. This maps e-mail traffic coming from port 25 to the highest priority, which you have created in the previous screen (see the IP Protocol field). This also maps your computers IP address and MAC address to the E-mail queue (see the Source fields). XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 50 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4 Verify that the queue setup works by checking Network Setting > QoS > Monitor. This shows the bandwidth allotted to e-mail traffic compared to other network traffic. 4.7 Access the XMG Using DDNS If you connect your XMG to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP address, it is inconvenient for you to manage the device from the Internet. The XMGs WAN IP address changes dynamically. Dynamic DNS (DDNS) allows you to access the XMG using a domain name. http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org A a.b.c.d w.x.y.z To use this feature, you have to apply for DDNS service at www.dyndns.org. This tutorial covers:

Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org Configuring DDNS on Your XMG Testing the DDNS Setting Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use DDNS. 4.7.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org 1 Open a browser and type http://www.dyndns.org. 2 Apply for a user account. This tutorial uses UserName1 and 12345 as the username and password. 3 Log into www.dyndns.org using your account. 4 Add a new DDNS host name. This tutorial uses the following settings as an example. Hostname: zyxelrouter.dyndns.org Service Type: Host with IP address IP Address: Enter the WAN IP address that your XMG is currently using. You can find the IP address on the XMGs Web Configurator Status page. Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the XMG later. 4.7.2 Configuring DDNS on Your XMG Configure the following settings in the Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS screen. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 51 Chapter 4 Tutorials Select Enable Dynamic DNS. Select www.DynDNS.com as the service provider. Type zyxelrouter.dyndns.org in the Host Name field. Enter the user name (UserName1) and password (12345). Click Apply. 4.7.3 Testing the DDNS Setting Now you should be able to access the XMG from the Internet. To test this:

1 Open a web browser on the computer (using the IP address a.b.c.d) that is connected to the Internet. 2 3 Type http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org and press [Enter]. The XMGs login page should appear. You can then log into the XMG and manage it. 4.8 Configuring the MAC Address Filter Thomas noticed that his daughter Josephine spends too much time surfing the web and downloading media files. He decided to prevent Josephine from accessing the Internet so that she can concentrate on preparing for her final exams. Josephines computer connects wirelessly to the Internet through the XMG. Thomas decides to use the Security > MAC Filter screen to grant wireless network access to his computer but not to Josephines computer. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 52 Chapter 4 Tutorials Thomas Josephine 1 Click Security > MAC Filter to open the MAC Filter screen. Select the Enable check box to activate MAC filter function. 2 Select Active. Then enter the host name and MAC address of Thomas computer in this screen. Click Apply. Thomas can also grant access to the computers of other members of his family and friends. However, Josephine and others not listed in this screen will no longer be able to access the Internet through the XMG. 4.9 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer Here is how to use an FTP program to access a file storage device connected to the XMGs USB port. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 53 Chapter 4 Tutorials Note: This example uses the FileZilla FTP program to browse your shared files. 1 In FileZilla enter the IP address of the XMG (the default is 192.168.1.1), your accounts user name and password and port 21 and click Quickconnect. A screen asking for password authentication appears. File Sharing via Windows Explorer 2 Once you log in the USB device displays in the mnt folder. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 54 PART II Technical Reference 55 CHAPTER 5 Network Map and Status Screens 5.1 Overview After you log into the Web Configurator, the Network Map screen appears. This shows the network connection status of the XMG and clients connected to it. You can use the Status screen to look at the current status of the XMG, system resources, and interfaces

(LAN, WAN, and WLAN). 5.2 The Network Map Screen Use this screen to view the network connection status of the device and its clients. A warning message appears if there is a connection problem. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 56 Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens Figure 17 If you want to view information about a client, click the clients name and Info. Click the IP address if you want to change it. If you want to change the name or icon of the client, click Change name/icon. If you prefer to view the status in a list, click List View in the Viewing mode selection box. You can configure how often you want the XMG to update this screen in Refresh interval. Figure 18 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 57 Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens 5.3 The Status Screen Use this screen to view the status of the XMG. Click Status to open this screen. Figure 19 Each field is described in the following table. Table 6 Status Screen LABEL Refresh Interval Device Information DESCRIPTION Select how often you want the XMG to update this screen. Host Name Model Number Serial Number Firmware Version This field displays the XMG system name. It is used for identification. This shows the model number of your XMG. This field displays the serial number of the XMG. This is the current version of the firmware inside the XMG. WAN Information (These fields display when you have a WAN connection.) This field displays the current encapsulation method. This field displays the current IP address of the XMG in the WAN. This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN. This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your XMG. This field displays the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Encapsulation IP Address IP Subnet Mask MAC Address Primary DNS server XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 58 Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens Table 6 Status Screen (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION This field displays the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Secondary DNS server DHCP LAN Information IP Address IP Subnet Mask IPv6 Link Local Address DHCP MAC Address This field displays whether the WAN interface is using a DHCP IP address or a static IP address. Choices are:

Client - The WAN interface can obtain an IP address from a DHCP server. None - The WAN interface is using a static IP address. This is the current IP address of the XMG in the LAN. This is the current subnet mask in the LAN. This field displays the current link-local address of the XMG for the LAN interface. This field displays what DHCP services the XMG is providing to the LAN. The possible values are:

Server - The XMG is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN. Relay - The XMG acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. Disable - The XMG is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN. This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your XMG. WLAN 2.4GHz/5GHz Information MAC Address Status SSID Channel Security 802.11 Mode WPS Security Firewall System Status System Up Time Current Date/

Time System Resource CPU Usage Memory Usage This shows the wireless adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of the wireless interface. This displays whether the WLAN is activated. This is the descriptive name used to identify the XMG in a wireless LAN. This is the channel number used by the wireless interface now. This displays the type of security mode the wireless interface is using in the wireless LAN. This displays the type of 802.11 mode the wireless interface is using in the wireless LAN. This displays whether WPS is activated on the wireless interface. This displays the firewalls current security level. This field displays how long the XMG has been running since it last started up. The XMG starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it (Maintenance > Reboot), or when you reset it. This field displays the current date and time in the XMG. You can change this in Maintenance> Time Setting. This field displays what percentage of the XMGs processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the XMG is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using QoS; see Chapter 10 on page 131). This field displays what percentage of the XMGs memory is currently used. Usually, this percentage should not increase much. If memory usage does get close to 100%, the XMG is probably becoming unstable, and you should restart the device. See Section 35.2 on page 234, or turn off the device (unplug the power) for a few seconds. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 59 Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens Table 6 Status Screen (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION This field displays what percentage of the XMG supported NAT sessions are currently being used. This field also displays the number of active NAT sessions and the maximum number of NAT sessions the XMG can support. NAT Session Usage Interface Status Interface Status Rate This column displays each interface the XMG has. This field indicates the interfaces use status. For the LAN and Ethernet WAN interfaces, this field displays Up when using the interface and NoLink when not using the interface. For a WLAN interface, this field displays the enabled (Up) or disabled (Disable) state of the interface. For the DSL interface, this field displays Down (line down), Up (line up or connected), Drop

(dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE encapsulation, and NoLink when not using the interface. For the Ethernet WAN and LAN interfaces, this displays the port speed and duplex setting. For the DSL interface, it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate. For the WLAN interface, it displays the maximum transmission rate or N/A with WLAN disabled. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 60 CHAPTER 6 Broadband 6.1 Overview This chapter discusses the XMGs Broadband screens. Use these screens to configure your XMG for Internet access. A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet. It connects your private networks, such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations. Figure 20 LAN and WAN WAN 6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Broadband screen to view, remove or add a WAN interface. You can also configure the WAN settings on the XMG for Internet access (Section 6.2 on page 65). Use the Advanced screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL, Annex M/Annex J, and DSL PhyR functions (Section 6.3 on page 72). Use the Ethernet WAN screen to enable the fourth Ethernet LAN port to be an Ethernet WAN port

(Section 6.4 on page 75). Use the 802.1x screen to view and configure the IEEE 802.1X settings on the XMG (Section 6.5 on page 76). Table 7 WAN Setup Overview LAYER-2 INTERFACE CONNECTION DSL LINK TYPE MODE ADSL/VDSL over Routing PTM N/A INTERNET CONNECTION ENCAPSULATION PPPoE IPoE N/A Bridge XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 61 CONNECTION SETTINGS PPP information, IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature, DNS server, VLAN, and MTU IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature, DNS server, VLAN, and MTU VLAN Chapter 6 Broadband Table 7 WAN Setup Overview LAYER-2 INTERFACE CONNECTION DSL LINK TYPE MODE ADSL over ATM EoA Routing INTERNET CONNECTION ENCAPSULATION PPPoE/PPPoA Ethernet N/A IPoE/IPoA N/A PPPoE IPoE N/A Bridge Routing Bridge 6.1.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. WAN IP Address CONNECTION SETTINGS ATM PVC configuration, PPP information, IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature, DNS server, VLAN, and MTU ATM PVC configuration, IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature, DNS server, VLAN, and MTU ATM PVC configuration PPP user name and password, WAN IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature, DNS server, VLAN, and MTU WAN IPv4/IPv6 IP address, NAT, DNS server and routing feature VLAN The WAN IP address is an IP address for the XMG, which makes it accessible from an outside network. It is used by the XMG to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the XMG tries to access the Internet. If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es). ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) is a WAN networking technology that provides high-speed data transfer. ATM uses fixed-size packets of information called cells. With ATM, a high QoS (Quality of Service) can be guaranteed. ATM uses a connection-oriented model and establishes a virtual circuit (VC) between Finding Out More PTM Packet Transfer Mode (PTM) is packet-oriented and supported by the VDSL2 standard. In PTM, packets are encapsulated directly in the High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) frames. It is designed to provide a low-overhead, transparent way of transporting packets over DSL links, as an alternative to ATM. IPv6 Introduction IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP addresses. The XMG can use IPv4/IPv6 dual stack to connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks, and supports IPv6 rapid deployment

(6RD). XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 62 Chapter 6 Broadband IPv6 Addressing The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000. IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:

Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0. Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015, 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15. IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address compose the network address. The prefix length is written as /x where x is a number. For example, 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32 means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix. IPv6 Subnet Masking Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character

(1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each blocks 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000. IPv6 Rapid Deployment Use IPv6 Rapid Deployment (6rd) when the local network uses IPv6 and the ISP has an IPv4 network. When the XMG has an IPv4 WAN address and you set IPv4/IPv6 Mode to IPv4 Only, you can enable 6rd to encapsulate IPv6 packets in IPv4 packets to cross the ISPs IPv4 network. The XMG generates a global IPv6 prefix from its IPv4 WAN address and tunnels IPv6 traffic to the ISPs Border Relay router (BR in the figure) to connect to the native IPv6 Internet. The local network can also use IPv4 services. The XMG uses its configured IPv4 WAN IP to route IPv4 traffic to the IPv4 Internet. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 63 Figure 21 IPv6 Rapid Deployment LAN

- IPv6

- IPv4

+

IPv6 IPv4 Chapter 6 Broadband WAN

- IPv4

- IPv6 in IPv4 ISP (IPv4) IPv6 in IPv4 BR IPv6 Internet IPv4 IPv4 Internet Dual Stack Lite Use Dual Stack Lite when local network computers use IPv4 and the ISP has an IPv6 network. When the XMG has an IPv6 WAN address and you set IPv4/IPv6 Mode to IPv6 Only, you can enable Dual Stack Lite to use IPv4 computers and services. The XMG tunnels IPv4 packets inside IPv6 encapsulation packets to the ISPs Address Family Transition Router (AFTR in the graphic) to connect to the IPv4 Internet. The local network can also use IPv6 services. The XMG uses its configured IPv6 WAN IP to route IPv6 traffic to the IPv6 Internet. Figure 22 Dual Stack Lite LAN

- IPv6

- IPv4 IPv6 IPv4

+

WAN

- IPv6

- IPv4 in IPv6 ISP (IPv6) IPv6 IPv4 in IPv6 AFTR IPv4 Internet IPv6 Internet 6.1.3 Before You Begin You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address. Get this information from your ISP. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 64 Chapter 6 Broadband 6.2 The Broadband Screen Use this screen to change your XMGs Internet access settings. Click Network Setting > Broadband from the menu. The summary table shows you the configured WAN services (connections) on the XMG. Figure 23 Network Setting > Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this button to create a new connection. Table 8 Network Setting > Broadband LABEL Add New WAN Interface

#

Name Type Mode Encapsulation 802.1p This is the index number of the entry. This is the service name of the connection. This shows whether it is an ATM, Ethernet or a PTM connection. This shows whether the connection is in routing or bridge mode. This is the method of encapsulation used by this connection. This indicates the 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This displays N/A when there is no priority level assigned. This indicates the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This displays N/A when there is no VLAN ID number assigned. This shows whether the XMG act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this connection. This shows whether the XMG use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway. This shows whether IPv6 is activated or not for this connection. IPv6 is not available when the connection uses the bridging service. This shows whether Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is activated or not for this connection. MLD is not available when the connection uses the bridging service. Click the Edit icon to configure the WAN connection. Click the Delete icon to remove the WAN connection. 802.1q IGMP Proxy NAT Default Gateway IPv6 MLD Proxy Modify 6.2.1 Add/Edit Internet Connection Click Add New WAN Interface in the Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to an existing WAN interface to configure a WAN connection. The screen varies depending on the interface type, mode, encapsulation, and IPv6/IPv4 mode you select. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 65 Chapter 6 Broadband 6.2.1.1 Routing Mode Use Routing mode if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. The following example screen displays when you select the ADSL/VDSL over ATM connection type, Routing mode, and IPoE encapsulation. The screen varies when you select other interface type, encapsulation, and IPv4/IPv6 mode. Figure 24 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (Routing Mode) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 9 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (Routing Mode) LABEL General Name Specify a descriptive name for this connection. DESCRIPTION XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 66 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 9 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (Routing Mode) (continued) LABEL Type Mode DESCRIPTION Select whether it is an ADSL/VDSL over PTM, ADSL over ATM connection or Ethernet. Select Routing if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. This option is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field. The choices depend on the connection type you selected. If your connection type is ADSL/VDSL over PTM, the choices are PPPoE and IPoE. If your connection type is ADSL over ATM, the choices are PPPoE, PPPoA, IPoE and IPoA. If your connection type is Ethernet, the choices are PPPoE and IPoE. Select IPv4 Only if you want the XMG to run IPv4 only. Select IPv4 IPv6 DualStack to allow the XMG to run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time. Select IPv6 Only if you want the XMG to run IPv6 only. Encapsulation IPv4/IPv6 Mode ATM PVC Configuration (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL over ATM.) VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you. The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM VCI traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you. Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices are:

LLC/SNAP-BRIDGING: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header. This is available only when you select IPoE or PPPoE in the Select DSL Link Type field. Encapsulation Mode VC/MUX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit (VC). To transport multiple protocols, the XMG needs separate VCs. There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC. This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit (PDU) payload. LLC/ENCAPSULATION: More than one protocol can be carried over the same VC. This is available only when you select PPPoA in the Encapsulation field. LLC/SNAP-ROUTING: In LCC encapsulation, an IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC) header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs. The LCC header can be followed by an IEEE 802.1a SubNetwork Attachment Point (SNAP) header. This is available only when you select IPoA in the Encapsulation field. Service Category Select UBR Without PCR or UBR With PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-

mail. Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. IP Address (This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv4 IPv6 DualStack in the IPv4/IPv6 Mode field.) Obtain an IP Address Automatically A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select this if you have a dynamic IP address. This field displays when editing an existing WAN interface. Type the class vender ID you want the XMG to add in the DHCP Discovery packets that go to the DHCP server. This field displays when editing an existing WAN interface. Type the Identity Association Identifier

(IAD) you want the XMG to add in the DHCP Discovery packets that go to the DHCP server. This field displays when editing an existing WAN interface. Type the DHCP Unique Identifier (DUID) you want the XMG to add in the DHCP Discovery packets that go to the DHCP server. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 67 DHCP option 60/

Vendor ID DHCP option 61 IAD DHCP option 61 DUID Chapter 6 Broadband Table 9 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (Routing Mode) (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION This field displays when editing an existing WAN interface. Type the vender specific information you want the XMG to add in the DHCP Offer packets. The information is used, for example, for configuring an ACSs (Auto Configuration Server) URL. Static IP Address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address DHCP option 43 Enable Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP. IP Address Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP. Gateway IP Address Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP. VLAN (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL/VDSL over PTM.) Active 802.1p Select this to enable VLAN on this WAN interface. IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level. Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this connection. Enter the MTU (Maximum Transfer Unit) size for this traffic. 802.1q MTU MTU Size Routing Feature (This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv4 IPv6 DualStack in the IPv4/IPv6 Mode field.) NAT Enable Fullcone NAT Enable Select this option to activate NAT on this connection. Select this option to enable full cone NAT on this connection. This field is available only when you activate NAT. In full cone NAT, the XMG maps all outgoing packets from an internal IP address and port to a single IP address and port on the external network. The XMG also maps packets coming to that external IP address and port to the internal IP address and port. Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP Proxy Enable Select this option to have the XMG act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. This allows the XMG to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly. Select this option to have the XMG use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway. Apply as Default Gateway DNS Server (This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv4 IPv6 DualStack in the IPv4/IPv6 Mode field.) Select Obtain DNS Info Automically if you want the XMG to use the DNS server addresses assigned by your ISP. Select Use Following Static DNS Address if you want the XMG to use the DNS server addresses you configure manually. Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Tunnel The DS-Lite (Dual Stack Lite) fields display when you set the IPv4/IPv6 Mode field to IPv6 Only. Enable Dual Stack Lite to let local computers use IPv4 through an ISPs IPv6 network. See Dual Stack Lite on page 64 for more information. Enable DS-Lite This is available only when you select IPv6 Only in the IPv4/IPv6 Mode field. Select Enable to let local computers use IPv4 through an ISPs IPv6 network. Specify the transition routers IPv6 address. DS-Lite Relay Server IP XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 68 Chapter 6 Broadband DESCRIPTION Table 9 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (Routing Mode) (continued) LABEL 6RD The 6RD (IPv6 rapid deployment) fields display when you set the IPv6/IPv4 Mode field to IPv4 Only. See IPv6 Rapid Deployment on page 63 for more information. 6RD Select Enable to tunnel IPv6 traffic from the local network through the ISPs IPv4 network. Select Manually Configured if you have the IPv4 address of the relay server. Otherwise, select Automatically configured by DHCPC to have the XMG detect it automatically through DHCP. The Automatically configured by DHCPC option is configurable only when you set the method of encapsulation to IPoE. Enter an IPv6 prefix for tunneling IPv6 traffic to the ISPs border relay router and connecting to the native IPv6 Internet. Enter the subnet mask number (1~32) for the IPv4 network. Service Provider IPv6 Prefix IPv4 Mask Length Border Relay IPv4 Address DHCPC Options (This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv4 IPv6 DualStack in the IPv4/IPv6 Mode field.) Select Option 43 to have the XMG automatically add vendor specific information in the DHCP Request Options packets to request the vendor specific options from the DHCP server. Select Option 121 to have the XMG push static routes to clients. When you select Manually Configured, specify the relay servers IPv4 address in this field. Sent Options option 60 Vendor ID option 61 IAID DUID option 125 Select this and enter the device identity you want the XMG to add in the DHCP discovery packets that go to the DHCP server. Enter the Vendor Class Identifier, such as the type of the hardware or firmware. Select this and enter any string that identifies the device. Enter the Identity Association Identifier (IAID) of the device, for example, the WAN connection index number. Enter the hardware type, a time value and the MAC address of the device. Select this to have the XMG automatically generate and add vendor specific parameters in the DHCP discovery packets that go to the DHCP server. IPv6 Address (This is available only when you select IPv4 IPv6 DualStack or IPv6 Only in the IPv4/IPv6 Mode field.) Select Obtain an IPv6 Address Automatically if you want to have the XMG use the IPv6 prefix Obtain an IPv6 Address from the connected routers Router Advertisement (RA) to generate an IPv6 address. Automatically Static IPv6 Address Select Static IPv6 Address if you have a fixed IPv6 address assigned by your ISP. When you select this, the following fields appear. Enter an IPv6 IP address that your ISP gave to you for this WAN interface. IPv6 Address Prefix Length Enter the address prefix length to specify how many most significant bits in an IPv6 address IPv6 Default Gateway compose the network address. Enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same segment as your XMG's interface(s). The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. IPv6 Routing Feature (This is available only when you select IPv4 IPv6 DualStack or IPv6 Only in the IPv4/IPv6 Mode field. You can enable IPv6 routing features in the following section.) MLD Proxy Enable Select this checkbox to have the XMG act as an MLD proxy on this connection. This allows the XMG to get subscription information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly. Select this option to have the XMG use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway. Apply as Default Gateway XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 69 Chapter 6 Broadband DESCRIPTION Select Obtain IPv6 DNS Info Automatically to have the XMG get the IPv6 DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically. Table 9 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (Routing Mode) (continued) LABEL IPv6 DNS Server This is available only when you select IPv4 IPv6 DualStack or IPv6 Only in the IPv4/IPv6 Mode field. Configure the IPv6 DNS server in the following section. Obtain IPv6 DNS Info Automatically Use Following Static IPv6 DNS Address Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Apply Cancel Select Use Following Static IPv6 DNS Address to have the XMG use the IPv6 DNS server addresses you configure manually. Click Apply to save your changes back to the XMG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Enter the second IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Enter the first IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP. 6.2.1.2 Bridge Mode Click the Add new WAN Interface in the Network Setting > Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to the connection you want to configure. Select Bridge as the encapsulation mode. The screen varies depending on the interface type you select. If you select ADSL/VDSL over PTM or Ethernet as the interface type, the following screen appears. Figure 25 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (ADSL/VDSL over PTM -Bridge Mode) XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 70 Chapter 6 Broadband The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 10 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (ADSL/VDSL over PTM -Bridge or Ethernet Mode) LABEL General Name Type Enter a service name of the connection. Select ADSL/VDSL over PTM as the interface that you want to configure. The XMG uses the VDSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port. Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISPs DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use routing functions, such as QoS, Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s). This section is available only when you select ADSL/VDSL over PTM in the Type field. Select Enable to enable VLAN on this WAN interface. IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level. Type the VLAN ID number (from 0 to 4094) for traffic through this connection. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Mode VLAN Active 802.1p 802.1q OK Cancel If you select ADSL over ATM as the interface type, the following screen appears. Figure 26 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (ADSL over ATM-Bridge Mode) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 11 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (ADSL over ATM-Bridge Mode) LABEL General Name Enter a service name of the connection. DESCRIPTION XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 71 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 11 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (ADSL over ATM-Bridge Mode) LABEL Type DESCRIPTION Select ADSL over ATM as the interface that you want to configure. The XMG uses the ADSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port. Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISPs DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use routing functions, such as QoS, Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s). Mode ATM PVC Configuration (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL over ATM.) VPI VCI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you. The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you. Encapsulation Service Category VLAN Active 802.1p 802.1q OK Cancel Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices are:

LLC/SNAP-BRIDGING: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header. This is available only when you select IPoE or PPPoE in the Encapsulation field. VC/MUX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit (VC). To transport multiple protocols, the XMG needs separate VCs. There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC. This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit (PDU) payload. Select UBR Without PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. This section is available only when you select ADSL/VDSL over PTM in the Type field. Select Enable to enable VLAN on this WAN interface. IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level. Type the VLAN ID number (from 0 to 4094) for traffic through this connection. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 6.3 The Advanced Screen Use the Advanced screen to enable or disable ADSL over PTM, Annex M, DSL PhyR, and SRA (Seamless Rate Adaptation) functions. The XMG supports the PhyR retransmission scheme. PhyR is a retransmission scheme designed to provide protection against noise on the DSL line. It improves voice, video and data transmission resilience by utilizing a retransmission buffer. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 72 Chapter 6 Broadband ITU-T G.993.2 standard defines a wide range of settings for various parameters, some of which are encompassed in profiles as shown in the next table. Table 12 VDSL Profiles PROFILE BANDWIDTH

(MHZ) NUMBER OF DOWNSTREAM CARRIERS CARRIER BANDWIDTH

(KHZ) POWER (DBM) 8a 8b 8c 8d 12a 12b 17a 30a 8.832 8.832 8.5 8.832 12 12 17.664 30 2048 2048 1972 2048 2783 2783 4096 3479 4.3125 4.3125 4.3125 4.3125 4.3125 4.3125 4.3125 8.625 17.5 20.5 11.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 Click Network Setting > Broadband > Advanced to display the following screen. Figure 27 Network Setting > Broadband > Advanced MAX. DOWNSTREAM THROUGHPUT

(MBIT/S) 50 50 50 50 68 68 100 200 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 73 Chapter 6 Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 13 Network Setting > Broadband > Advanced LABEL PhyR US PhyR DS Bitswap SRA ADSL Modulation PTM over ADSL:

G.dmt:

G.lite :

T1.413 :

ADSL2 :

AnnexL :

ADSL2+ :

AnnexM :

VDSL2 VDSL Profile DESCRIPTION Enable or disable PhyR US (upstream) for upstream transmission to the WAN. PhyR US should be enabled if data being transmitted upstream is sensitive to noise. However, enabling PhyR US can decrease the US line rate. Enabling or disabling PhyR will require the CPE to retrain. For PhyR to function, the DSLAM must also support PhyR and have it enabled. Enable or disable PhyR DS (downstream) for downstream transmission from the WAN. PhyR DS should be enabled if data being transmitted downstream is sensitive to noise. However, enabling PhyR DS can decrease the DS line rate. Enabling or disabling PhyR will require the CPE to retrain. For PhyR to function, the DSLAM must also support PhyR and have it enabled. Select Enable to allow the XMG to adapt to line changes when you are using G.dmt. Bit-swapping is a way of keeping the line more stable by constantly monitoring and redistributing bits between channels. Enable or disable Seamless Rate Adaption (SRA). Select Enable to have the XMG automatically adjust the connections data rate according to line conditions without interrupting service. Select Enable to use PTM over ADSL. Since PTM has less overhead than ATM, some ISPs use this for better performance. ITU G.992.1 (better known as G.dmt) is an ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation. G.dmt full-rate ADSL expands the usable bandwidth of existing copper telephone lines, delivering high-speed data communications at rates up to 8 Mbit/s downstream and 1.3 Mbit/s upstream. ITU G.992.2 (better known as G.lite) is an ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation. G.lite does not strictly require the use of DSL filters, but like all variants of ADSL generally functions better with splitters. ANSI T1.413 is a technical standard that defines the requirements for the single asymmetric digital subscriber line (ADSL) for the interface between the telecommunications network and the customer installation in terms of their interaction and electrical characteristics. It optionally extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates to 12 Mbit/s downstream and, depending on Annex version, up to 3.5 Mbit/s upstream (with a mandatory capability of ADSL2 transceivers of 8 Mbit/s downstream and 800 kbit/s upstream). Annex L is an optional specification in the ITU-T ADSL2 recommendation G.992.3 titled Specific requirements for a Reach Extended ADSL2 (READSL2) system operating in the frequency band above POTS, therefore it is often referred to as Reach Extended ADSL2 or READSL2.The main difference between this specification and commonly deployed Annex A is the maximum distance that can be used. The power of the lower frequencies used for transmitting data is boosted up to increase the reach of this signal up to 7 kilometers (23,000 ft). ADSL2+ extends the capability of basic ADSL by doubling the number of downstream channels. The data rates can be as high as 24 Mbit/s downstream and up to 1.4 Mbit/s upstream depending on the distance from the DSLAM to the customer's premises. Annex M is an optional specification in ITU-T recommendations G.992.3 (ADSL2) and G.992.5

(ADSL2+), also referred to as ADSL2 M and ADSL2+ M. This specification extends the capability of commonly deployed Annex A by more than doubling the number of upstream bits. The data rates can be as high as 12 or 24 Mbit/s downstream and 3 Mbit/s upstream depending on the distance from the DSLAM to the customer's premises. VDSL is a specification that supports wide deployment of voice, video, data and HDTV. The data can be as high as on ADSL2+. It has a long reach performance, and unlike VDSL systems it is not limited to short local loops. VDSL2 profiles differ in the width of the frequency band used to transmit the broadband signal. Profiles that use a wider frequency band can deliver higher maximum speeds. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 74 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 13 Network Setting > Broadband > Advanced (continued) LABEL 8a, 8b, 8c, 8d, 12a, 12b, 17a, 30a, US0 DESCRIPTION The G.993.2 VDSL standard defines a wide range of profiles that can be used in different VDSL deployment settings, such as in a central office, a street cabinet or a building. The XMG must comply with at least one profile specified in G.993.2. but compliance with more than one profile is allowed. Click Apply to save your changes back to the XMG. Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration. Apply Cancel 6.4 The Ethernet WAN Screen You can enable the fourth Ethernet LAN port to be an Ethernet WAN port in the Ethernet WAN screen. Click Network Setting > Broadband > Ethernet WAN to display the following screen. Figure 28 Network Setting > Broadband > Ethernet WAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 14 Network Setting > Broadband > Ethernet WAN LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Select Enable to convert the fourth Ethernet LAN port to the Ethernet WAN port. Otherwise, select Disable. Click Apply to save your changes back to the XMG. Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration. Apply Cancel XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 75 Chapter 6 Broadband 6.5 The 802.1x Screen You can view and configure the 802.1X authentication settings in the 802.1x screen. Click Network Setting > Broadband > 802.1x to display the following screen. Figure 29 Network Setting > Broadband > 802.1x The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 15 Network Setting > Broadband > 802.1x LABEL

#

Status Interface EAP Identity EAP method Bidirectional Authentication Certificate Trusted CA Modify DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the authentication is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this authentication is active. A gray bulb signifies that this authentication is not active. This is the interface that uses the authentication. This displays N/A when there is no interface assigned. This shows the EAP identity of the authentication. This displays N/A when there is no EAP identity assigned. This shows the EAP method used in the authentication. This displays N/A when there is no EAP method assigned. This shows whether bidirectional authentication is allowed. This shows the certificate used for this authentication. This displays N/A when there is no certificate assigned. This shows the Trusted CA used for this authentication. This displays N/A when there is no Trusted CA assigned. Click this icon to edit an item. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 76 Chapter 6 Broadband 6.5.1 Modify 802.1X Settings Use this screen to edit 802.1X authentication settings. Click the Edit icon next to the rule you want to edit. The screen shown next appears. Figure 30 Network Setting > Broadband > 802.1x > Modify The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 16 Network Setting > Broadband > 802.1x: Edit LABEL Active DESCRIPTION This field allows you to activate/deactivate the authentication. Select this to enable the authentication. Clear this to disable this authentication without having to delete the entry. Select an interface to which the authentication applies. Enter the EAP identity of the authentication. This is the EAP method used for this authentication. Select Enable to allow bidirectional authentication. Select the certificate you want to assign to the authentication. You need to import the certificate in the Security > Certificates > Local Certificates screen. Select the Trusted CA you want to assign to the authentication. You need to import the certificate in the Security > Certificates > Trusted CA screen. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Interface EAP Identity EAP method Bidirectional Authentication Certificate Trusted CA OK Cancel 6.6 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the XMG features described in this chapter. Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The XMG can work in bridge mode or routing mode. When the XMG is in routing mode, it supports the following methods. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 77 Chapter 6 Broadband IP over Ethernet IP over Ethernet (IPoE) is an alternative to PPPoE. IP packets are being delivered across an Ethernet network, without using PPP encapsulation. They are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment. For instance, it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged Ethernet cells. PPP over ATM (PPPoA) PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A PPPoA connection functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The XMG encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service Providers (ISP) DSLAM (digital access multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP. PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial-up services using PPP. PPPoE is an IETF standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example RADIUS). One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals. Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the XMG (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the XMG does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs computers will have access. RFC 1483 RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit (LLC-based multiplexing) and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit (VC-based multiplexing). Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed information. Multiplexing There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP. VC-based Multiplexing In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for example, VC1 carries IP, etc. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 78 Chapter 6 Broadband LLC-based Multiplexing In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs. Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections. Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed. Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be greater than the PCR. Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again. If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate. The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS. Figure 31 Example of Traffic Shaping ATM Traffic Classes These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4.0 Specification. Constant Bit Rate (CBR) Constant Bit Rate (CBR) provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being sent. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate delay). CBR is used for connections that XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 79 Chapter 6 Broadband continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate, cells may be dropped. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution video and voice. Variable Bit Rate (VBR) The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections. Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into real time (VBR-RT) or non-real time (VBR-nRT) connections. The VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth (a PCR is specified) but is only available when data is being sent. An example of an VBR-RT connection would be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics. The VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It is commonly used for "bursty" traffic typical on LANs. PCR and MBS define the burst levels, SCR defines the minimum level. An example of an VBR-nRT connection would be non-time sensitive data file transfers. Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers. However, UBR doesn't guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth. An example application is background file transfer. IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP. However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and default gateway. Introduction to VLANs A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group(s); the traffic must first go through a router. In Multi-Tenant Unit (MTU) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building. VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 80 Chapter 6 Broadband Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier), residing within the type/length field of the Ethernet frame) and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information), starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame). The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet switches. If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum number of 4,096 VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A frame with VID

(VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the 4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved, so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4,094. TPID User Priority 2 Bytes 3 Bits CFI 1 Bit VLAN ID 12 Bits Multicast IP packets are transmitted in either one of two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network -

not everybody and not just 1. Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts (including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group. At start up, the XMG queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the XMG periodically updates this information. DNS Server Address Assignment Use Domain Name System (DNS) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The XMG can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways. 1 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually enter them in the DNS server fields. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 81 Chapter 6 Broadband 2 If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the XMGs WAN IP address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP. IPv6 Addressing The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000. IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:

Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0. Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015, 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15. IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address compose the network address. The prefix length is written as /x where x is a number. For example, 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32 means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 82 CHAPTER 7 Wireless 7.1 Overview This chapter describes the XMGs Network Setting > Wireless screens. Use these screens to set up your XMGs wireless connection. 7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter This section describes the XMGs Wireless screens. Use these screens to set up your XMGs wireless connection. Use the General screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode (Section 7.2 on page 84). Use the Guest/More AP screen to set up multiple wireless networks on your XMG (Section 7.3 on page 88). Use the MAC Authentication screen to allow or deny wireless clients based on their MAC addresses from connecting to the XMG (Section 7.4 on page 91). Use the WPS screen to enable or disable WPS, view or generate a security PIN (Personal Identification Number) (Section 7.5 on page 92). Use the WMM screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) to ensure quality of service in wireless networks for multimedia applications (Section 7.6 on page 94). Use the Others screen to configure wireless advanced features, such as the RTS/CTS Threshold

(Section 7.7 on page 95). Use the Channel Status screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results (Section 7.8 on page 96). 7.1.2 What You Need to Know Wireless Basics Wireless is essentially radio communication. In the same way that walkie-talkie radios send and receive information over the airwowaves, wireless networking devices exchange information with one another. A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange information with radios attached to other computers. Like walkie-talkies, most wireless networking devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to use. However, wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data encryption. Finding Out More See Section 7.9 on page 97 for advanced technical information on wireless networks. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 83 Chapter 7 Wireless 7.2 The General Screen Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode. Note: If you are configuring the XMG from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the XMGs SSID, channel or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the XMGs new settings. Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. Figure 32 Network Setting > Wireless > General XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 84 Chapter 7 Wireless The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen. Table 17 Network Setting > Wireless > General LABEL Wireless Network Setup Band DESCRIPTION Wireless Channel Bandwidth Control Sideband This shows the wireless band which this radio profile is using. 2.4GHz is the frequency used by IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless clients while 5GHz is used by IEEE 802.11a/ac wireless clients. You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field. Use Auto to have the XMG automatically determine a channel to use. Select whether the XMG uses a wireless channel width of 20MHz, 40MHz or 80MHz. A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps. 40MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase throughput. The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz. It is often better to use the 20 MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal. An 80MHz channel groups adjacent 40MHz channels into pairs to increase bandwidth even higher. Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding. This is available for some regions when you select a specific channel and set the Bandwidth field to 40MHz. Set whether the control channel (set in the Channel field) should be in the Lower or Upper range of channel bands. Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name

(SSID) Max Clients Hide SSID Multicast Forwarding Max. Upstream Bandwidth Max. Downstream Bandwidth BSSID Security Level The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN. Specify the maximum number of clients that can connect to this network at the same time. Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Select this check box to allow the XMG to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless unicast traffic. Specify the maximum rate for upstream wireless traffic to the WAN from this WLAN in kilobits per second (Kbps). Specify the maximum rate for downstream wireless traffic to this WLAN from the WAN in kilobits per second (Kbps). This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the XMG when wireless LAN is enabled. Select Basic (WEP) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the XMG. When you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication. Apply Cancel See the following sections for more details about this field. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 85 Chapter 7 Wireless 7.2.1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption or authentication. Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your XMG, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Figure 33 Wireless > General: No Security The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 18 Wireless > General: No Security LABEL Security Level DESCRIPTION Choose No Security to allow all wireless connections without data encryption or authentication. 7.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption) WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points

(AP) to keep network communications private. Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key. Note: WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using widely-

available software. It is strongly recommended that you use a more effective security mechanism. Use the strongest security mechanism that all the wireless devices in your network support. For example, use WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK if all your wireless devices support it, or use WPA or WPA2 if your wireless devices support it and you have a RADIUS server. If your wireless devices support nothing stronger than WEP, use the highest encryption level available. Your XMG allows you to configure up to four 64-bit or 128-bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time. Note: WEP is not available when you set the wireless band to 5GHz. In order to configure and enable WEP encryption, click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen, then select Basic as the security level. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 86 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 34 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 19 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP) LABEL Security Level Security Mode Generate password automatically Password 1~4 DESCRIPTION Select Basic to enable WEP data encryption. This shows WEP when you set Security Level to Basic. Select this option to have the XMG automatically generate a password. The password field will not be configurable when you select this option. The password (WEP keys) are used to encrypt data. Both the XMG and the wireless stations must use the same password (WEP key) for data transmission. If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters ("0-9",

"A-F"). If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-

F"). You must configure at least one password, only one password can be activated at any one time. Select password unmask to display the entered password in plain text. Clear it to hide the password to avoid shoulder surfing. Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click hide to hide them. Select 64-bit or 128-bit. This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use. more.../hide WEP Encryption 7.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) The WPA-PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over WEP. Using a Pre-Shared Key (PSK), both the XMG and the connecting client share a common password in order to validate the connection. This type of encryption, while robust, is not as strong as WPA, WPA2 or even WPA2-PSK. The WPA2-PSK security mode is a newer, more robust version of the WPA encryption standard. It offers slightly better security, although the use of PSK makes it less robust than it could be. Note: WPA-PSK is not available if you enable WPS before you configure them. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 87 Chapter 7 Wireless Click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the security level. Then select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list. Figure 35 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 20 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK LABEL Security Level Security Mode Generate password automatically Password DESCRIPTION Select More Secure to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption. Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box. Select this option to have the XMG automatically generate a password. The password field will not be configurable when you select this option. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. If you did not select Generate password automatically, you can manually type a pre-shared key from 8 to 64 case-sensitive keyboard characters. Select password unmask to display the entered password in plain text. Clear it to hide the password to avoid shoulder surfing. Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click hide to hide them. Select the encryption type (TKIP, AES or TKIP+AES) for data encryption. Select TKIP if your wireless clients can all use TKIP. Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES. Select TKIP+AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES. The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group key out to all clients. more.../hide Encryption Group Key Update Timer 7.3 The Guest/More AP Screen This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple Basic Service Sets (BSSs) on the XMG. Click Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP. The following screen displays. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 88 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 36 Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 21 Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP LABEL

#

Status DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry. This field indicates whether this SSID is active. A yellow bulb signifies that this SSID is active. A gray bulb signifies that this SSID is not active. An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the XMGs BSSs. The SSID (Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated. This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility. This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile. This displays if the guest WLAN function has been enabled for this WLAN. If Home Guest displays, clients connecting to the same SSID can communicate with each other directly. If External Guest displays, clients are blocked from connecting to each other directly. N/A displays if guest WLAN is disabled. Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile. SSID Security Guest WLAN Modify 7.3.1 Edit Guest/More AP Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the Guest/More AP screen. The following screen displays. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 89 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 37 Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP > Edit The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 22 Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP > Edit LABEL Wireless Network Setup Wireless Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name

(SSID) You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field. The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN. Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Select this to create Guest WLANs for home and external clients. Select the WLAN type in the Access Scenario field. Hide SSID Guest WLAN Access Scenario If you select Home Guest, clients connecting to the same SSID can communicate with each other directly. If you select External Guest, clients are blocked from connecting to each other directly. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 90 Chapter 7 Wireless DESCRIPTION Specify the maximum rate for upstream wireless traffic to the WAN from this WLAN in kilobits per second (Kbps). Specify the maximum rate for downstream wireless traffic to this WLAN from the WAN in kilobits per second (Kbps). Table 22 Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP > Edit (continued) LABEL Max. Upstream Bandwidth Max. Downstream Bandwidth BSSID SSID Subnet This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the XMG when wireless LAN is enabled. Select Enable if you want the wireless network interface to assign DHCP IP addresses to the associated wireless clients. Specify the first of the contiguous addresses in the DHCP IP address pool. DHCP Start Address DHCP End Address SSID Subnet Mask LAN IP Address Security Level Security Mode The XMG assigns IP addresses from this DHCP pool to wireless clients connecting to the SSID. Specify the last of the contiguous addresses in the DHCP IP address pool. Specify the subnet mask of the XMG for the SSID subnet. Specify the IP address of the XMG for the SSID subnet.. Select Basic (WEP) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the XMG. After you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication. Apply Cancel See Section 7.2.1 on page 86 for more details about this field. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 7.4 MAC Authentication This screen allows you to configure the Zyxel Device to give exclusive access to specific devices (Allow) or exclude specific devices from accessing the Zyxel Device (Deny). Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 91 Chapter 7 Wireless Use this screen to view your XMGs MAC filter settings and add new MAC filter rules. Click Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication. The screen appears as shown. Figure 38 Wireless > MAC Authentication The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 23 Wireless > MAC Authentication LABEL SSID MAC Restrict Mode DESCRIPTION Select the SSID for which you want to configure MAC filter settings. Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table. Select Disable to turn off MAC filtering. Select Deny to block access to the XMG. MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the XMG. Select Allow to permit access to the XMG. MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the XMG. Click this if you want to add a new MAC address entry to the MAC filter list below. Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the XMG in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc. This is the index number of the entry. This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the XMG. Click the Edit icon and type the MAC address of the peer device in a valid MAC address format

(six hexadecimal character pairs, for example 12:34:56:78:9a:bc). Click the Delete icon to delete the entry. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Add new MAC address

#

MAC Address Modify Apply Cancel 7.5 The WPS Screen Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your XMG. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection between two devices. Both devices must support WPS. See Section 7.9.8.3 on page 105 for more information about WPS. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 92 Chapter 7 Wireless Note: The XMG applies the security settings of the SSID1 profile (see Section 7.2 on page 84). If you want to use the WPS feature, make sure you have set the security mode of SSID1 to WPA2-PSK or No Security. Click Network Setting > Wireless > WPS. The following screen displays. Select Enable and click Apply to activate the WPS function. Then you can configure the WPS settings in this screen. Figure 39 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 24 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS LABEL General WPS Add a new device with WPS Method Method 1 Select Enable to activate WPS on this XMG. WPS Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using Push Button Configuration (PBC). Select Enable and click Apply to activate WPS method 1 on the XMG. Click this button to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless range of the XMG) to your wireless network. This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device, or a menu button similar to the WPS button on this screen. Note: You must press the other wireless devices WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button. Method 2 Register Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the client into the XMG. Select Enable and click Apply to activate WPS method 2 on the XMG. Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click Register to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network. You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the devices settings. Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the XMG. Method 3 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the XMG into the client. Select Enable and click Apply to activate WPS method 3 on the XMG. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 93 Chapter 7 Wireless Table 24 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION The default WPS status is configured. Release Configuration Generate New PIN Number Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the XMG. If this method has been enabled, the PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the XMG is shown here. Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS. The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method. Click the Generate New PIN button to have the XMG create a new PIN. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Cancel 7.6 The WMM Screen Use this screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) and WMM Power Save in wireless networks for multimedia applications. Click Network Setting > Wireless > WMM. The following screen displays. Figure 40 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 25 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM LABEL 2.4GHz WMM Setup / 5GHz WMM Setup WMM of SSID1~4 Select On to have the XMG automatically give the wireless network (SSIDx) a priority level DESCRIPTION according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends. WMM QoS (Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service) gives high priority to voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly. Select this option to extend the battery life of your mobile devices (especially useful for small devices that are running multimedia applications). The XMG goes to sleep mode to save power when it is not transmitting data. The AP buffers the packets sent to the XMG until the XMG "wakes up". The XMG wakes up periodically to check for incoming data. WMM Automatic Power Save Delivery(APSD) Note: This works only if the wireless device to which the XMG is connected also supports this feature. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 94 Chapter 7 Wireless 7.7 The Others Screen Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings. Click Network Setting > Wireless > Others. The screen appears as shown. See Section 7.9.2 on page 99 for detailed definitions of the terms listed in this screen. Figure 41 Network Setting > Wireless > Others The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 26 Network Setting > Wireless > Others LABEL RTS/CTS Threshold DESCRIPTION Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear To Send) handshake. Fragmentation Threshold Output Power Enter a value between 0 and 2347. This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256 and 2346. Set the output power of the XMG. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power to reduce interference with other APs. Select one of the following: 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% or 100%. Beacon Interval When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval. This specifies the time period before the device sends the beacon again. DTIM Interval The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low power mode before waking up to handle the beacon. This value can be set from 50ms to 1000ms. A high value helps save current consumption of the access point. Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM) is the time period after which broadcast and multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the Power Saving mode. A high DTIM value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network. This value can be set from 1 to 255. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 95 Chapter 7 Wireless Table 26 Network Setting > Wireless > Others (continued) LABEL 802.11 Mode DESCRIPTION Select 802.11b Only to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the XMG. Select 802.11g Only to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the XMG. Select 802.11n Only to allow only IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the XMG. Select 802.11b/g Mixed to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the XMG. The transmission rate of your XMG might be reduced. Select 802.11b/g/n Mixed to allow IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g or IEEE802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the XMG. The transmission rate of your XMG might be reduced. 802.11 Protection Enabling this feature can help prevent collisions in mixed-mode networks (networks with both IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g traffic). Select Auto to have the wireless devices transmit data after a RTS/CTS handshake. This helps improve IEEE 802.11g performance. Select Off to disable 802.11 protection. The transmission rate of your XMG might be reduced in a mixed-mode network. This field displays Off and is not configurable when you set 802.11 Mode to 802.11b Only. Select a preamble type from the drop-down list box. Choices are Long or Short. See Section 7.9.7 on page 103 for more information. This field is configurable only when you set 802.11 Mode to 802.11b. Select Enable to allow the coexistence of 20 MHz and 40 MHz Overlapping Basic Service Sets

(OBSS) in wireless local area networks. Select Disabled to disable this feature. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Preamble OBSS Coexistence Apply Cancel 7.8 The Channel Status Screen Use the Channel Status screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results. Click Network Setting > Wireless > Channel Status. The screen appears as shown. Click Scan to scan the wireless LAN channels. You can view the results in the Channel Scan Result section. Note: The Scan button only works when the XMG uses 20MHz for the wireless channel width. You can go to the Network Setting > Wireless > General screen, click the more link, and then change the channel width setting in the Bandwidth field. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 96 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 42 Network Setting > Wireless > Channel Status 7.9 Technical Reference This section discusses wireless LANs in depth. For more information, see Appendix B on page 255. 7.9.1 Wireless Network Overview Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges. A wireless client is a radio connected to a users computer. An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network. A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients, extending a networks range. Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways. An infrastructure type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points. An ad-hoc type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange information. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 97 Chapter 7 Wireless The following figure provides an example of a wireless network. Figure 43 Example of a Wireless Network The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B use the access point (AP) to interact with the other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your XMG is the AP. Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines. Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentifier. If two wireless networks overlap, they should use a different channel. Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, to send and receive information. Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP. Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Radio Channels In the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed, civilian use. For the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into numerous channels. This allows a variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another. When you create a network, you must select a channel to use. Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the number of available channels also varies. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 98 Chapter 7 Wireless 7.9.2 Additional Wireless Terms The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the XMGs Web Configurator. Table 27 Additional Wireless Terms TERM RTS/CTS Threshold DESCRIPTION In a wireless network which covers a large area, wireless devices are sometimes not aware of each others presence. This may cause them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through. By setting this value lower than the default value, the wireless devices must sometimes get permission to send information to the XMG. The lower the value, the more often the devices must get permission. If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value (see below), then wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the XMG. A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble modes:

long and short. If a device uses a different preamble mode than the XMG does, it cannot communicate with the XMG. The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a larger threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy. Preamble Authentication Fragmentation Threshold 7.9.3 Wireless Security Overview By their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data networks, this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves, but also join the network. Once an unauthorized person has access to the network, he or she can steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network, or understand the data carried on it. These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that only people presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a key phrase) can access the network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the information sent over the air is encoded. Only people with the code key can understand the information, and only people who have been authenticated are given the code key. These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the old Wired Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at all, but it will not keep a determined attacker out. Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not use them properly. For example, the WPA-PSK security standard is very secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an attackers software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if you use a short key which is very easy to guess -

for example, a three-letter word from the dictionary. Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, its not just people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security. Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is in place. A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use obscure information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a way that appears random and does not include real words. For example, if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite movie is XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 99 Chapter 7 Wireless Vanishing Point (which you know was made in 1971) you could use 70dodchal71vanpoi as your security key. The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network. 7.9.3.1 SSID Normally, the XMG acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the XMG does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess. This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network. 7.9.3.2 MAC Address Filter Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network, see the devices Users Guide or other documentation. You can use the MAC address filter to tell the XMG which devices are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct information. This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network. 7.9.3.3 User Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it. However, every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this. For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users. Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network. 1. 2. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 100 Chapter 7 Wireless 7.9.3.4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot understand the message. The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication. (See Section 7.9.3.3 on page 100 for information about this.) Table 28 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication Weakest NO AUTHENTICATION No Security Static WEP WPA-PSK RADIUS SERVER WPA Strongest WPA2-PSK WPA2 For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK. Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network with the XMG and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network. Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly. When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your XMG, you can also select an option (WPA compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the devices support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the WPA compatible option in the XMG. Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key. 7.9.4 Signal Problems Because wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to limitations of distance, interference and absorption. Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference may come from other radio transmissions, such as military or air traffic control communications, or from machines that are coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when physical objects (such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 101 Chapter 7 Wireless 7.9.5 BSS A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is disabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-

BSS traffic blocking is enabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Figure 44 Basic Service set 7.9.6 MBSSID Traditionally, you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets (BSSs). As well as the cost of buying extra APs, there is also the possibility of channel interference. The XMGs MBSSID (Multiple Basic Service Set IDentifier) function allows you to use one access point to provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying QoS priorities and/or security modes to different SSIDs. Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP. 7.9.6.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously. You must use different keys for different BSSs. If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs (they are in different BSSs), but have the same keys, they may hear each others communications (but not communicate with each other). MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802.1x security. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 102 Chapter 7 Wireless 7.9.7 Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet. Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short preamble. Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks. Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide more efficient communications. Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it, otherwise the XMG uses long preamble. Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate. 7.9.8 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) Your XMG supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each devices documentation to make sure). Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves. 7.9.8.1 Push Button Configuration WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information. Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button. Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button. 1 2 3 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another. Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration utility and locate the button (see the devices Users Guide for how to do this - for the XMG, see Section 7.6 on page 94). Press the button on one of the devices (it doesnt matter which). For the XMG you must press the WPS button for more than five seconds. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 103 Chapter 7 Wireless 4 Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name (SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee. If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. 7.9.8.2 PIN Configuration Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface). Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method. When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client) into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network. Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router

(referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method. 1 Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices. 2 Access the WPS section of the APs configuration interface. See the devices Users Guide for how to do this. 3 4 5 6 7 Look for the clients WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the WPS section of the clients configuration interface (see the devices Users Guide for how to find the WPS PIN - for the XMG, see Section 7.5 on page 92). Enter the clients PIN in the APs configuration interface. If the client devices configuration interface has an area for entering another devices PIN, you can either enter the clients PIN in the AP, or enter the APs PIN in the client - it does not matter which. Start WPS on both devices within two minutes. Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself. 8 On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect, WPS was successful. If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 104 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 45 Example WPS Process: PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR WPS This devices WPS PIN: 123456 WPS Enter WPS PIN from other device:

WPS WPS START START WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL SSID WPA(2)-PSK COMMUNICATION 7.9.8.3 How WPS Works When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a secure EAP

(Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is already part of a network, it sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly. The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a WPS-enabled access point. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 105 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 46 How WPS works ACTIVATE WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES ACTIVATE WPS ENROLLEE WPS HANDSHAKE SECURE TUNNEL SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION REGISTRAR The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary. The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device. Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients. By default, a WPS devices is unconfigured. This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes configured. A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset it to its factory defaults. 7.9.8.4 Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup. The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1 is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 106 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 47 WPS: Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 1 SECURITY INFO REGISTRAR AP1 In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2. Figure 48 WPS: Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR AP1 EXISTING CONNECTION O F Y I N R I T U C E S CLIENT 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 2 In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point. However, you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 107 Chapter 7 Wireless Figure 49 WPS: Example Network Step 3 CLIENT 1 REGISTRAR CLIENT 2 EXISTING CONNECTION N T I O C E N N O G C T I N X I S E SECURITY INFO AP1 ENROLLEE AP2 7.9.8.5 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware. WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP). When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other. For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way. WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS. WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK). When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network. You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not have access to the network. If this happens, open the access points configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the access XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 108 Chapter 7 Wireless point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients (usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 109 CHAPTER 8 Home Networking 8.1 Overview A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many networking devices are connected. It is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building. Use the LAN screens to help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses. LAN DSL 8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the LAN Setup screen to set the LAN IP address, subnet mask, and DHCP settings of your XMG

(Section 8.2 on page 112). Use the Static DHCP screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses (Section 8.3 on page 116). Use the UPnP screen to enable UPnP and UPnP NAT traversal on the XMG (Section 8.4 on page 117). Use the Additional Subnet screen to configure IP alias and public static IP (Section 8.5 on page 120). Use the STB Vendor ID screen to configure the Vendor IDs of the connected Set Top Box (STB) devices, which have the XMG automatically create static DHCP entries for the STB devices when they request IP addresses (Section 8.6 on page 121). Use the Wake on LAN screen to remotely turn on a device on the network. (Section 8.7 on page 121). Use the TFTP Server Name screen to set a TFTP server address which is passed to the clients using DHCP option 66. (Section 8.8 on page 122). XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 110 Chapter 8 Home Networking 8.1.2 What You Need To Know 8.1.2.1 About LAN IP Address IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts. Subnet Mask Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. DHCP A DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server can assign your XMG an IP address, subnet mask, DNS and other routing information when it's turned on. DNS DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a networking device before you can access it. RADVD (Router Advertisement Daemon) When an IPv6 host sends a Router Solicitation (RS) request to discover the available routers, RADVD with Router Advertisement (RA) messages in response to the request. It specifies the minimum and maximum intervals of RA broadcasts. RA messages containing the address prefix. IPv6 hosts can be generated with the IPv6 prefix an IPv6 address. 8.1.2.2 About UPnP Identifying UPnP Devices UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device. NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:

Dynamic port mapping Learning public IP addresses XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 111 Chapter 8 Home Networking Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP. See the for more information on NAT. Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments. When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the XMG allows multicast messages on the LAN only. All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention. UPnP and Zyxel Zyxel has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp. (UIC). Zyxel's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD) 1.0. See Section 8.4.1 on page 118 for examples of installing and using UPnP. Finding Out More See Section 8.9 on page 122 for technical background information on LANs. 8.1.3 Before You Begin Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen. 8.2 The LAN Setup Screen Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address and subnet mask of your XMG. Click Network Setting > Home Networking to open the LAN Setup screen. Follow these steps to configure your LAN settings. 1 2 Enter an IP address into the IP Address field. The IP address must be in dotted decimal notation. This will become the IP address of your XMG. Enter the IP subnet mask into the Subnet Mask field. Unless instructed otherwise it is best to leave this alone, the configurator will automatically compute a subnet mask based upon the IP address you entered. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 112 Chapter 8 Home Networking 3 Click Apply to save your settings. Figure 50 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 113 Chapter 8 Home Networking The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 29 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup LABEL Interface Group Group Name DESCRIPTION Select the interface group name for which you want to configure LAN settings. See Chapter 14 on page 171 for how to create a new interface group. LAN IP Setup IP Address Subnet Mask IGMP Snooping Active IGMP DHCP Server State DHCP DHCP Relay Server Address IP Address IP Addressing Values Beginning IP Address Ending IP Address Auto reserve IP for the same host DHCP Server Lease Time Days/Hours/

Minutes DNS Values DNS DNS Server 1/2 Enter the LAN IPv4 address you want to assign to your XMG in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default). Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example 255.255.255.0

(factory default). Your XMG automatically computes the subnet mask based on the IP Address you enter, so do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so. Select Enable to allows the XMG to passively learn multicast group. Select Standard Mode to allow the XMG to forward traffic only to ports that want to receive it. Select Blocking Mode to allow the XMG to block unknown muticast adresses. Select Enable to have the XMG act as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent. Select Disable to stop the DHCP server on the XMG. Select DHCP Relay to have the XMG forward DHCP request to the DHCP server. This field is only available when you select DHCP Relay in the DHCP field. Enter the IPv4 address of the actual remote DHCP server in this field. This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field. This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. This field specifies the last of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. Select Enable to have the XMG record DHCP IP addresses with the MAC addresses the IP addresses are assigned to. The XMG assigns the same IP address to the same MAC address when the host requests an IP address again through DHCP. This is the period of time DHCP-assigned addresses is used. DHCP automatically assigns IP addresses to clients when they log in. DHCP centralizes IP address management on central computers that run the DHCP server program. DHCP leases addresses, for a period of time, which means that past addresses are recycled and made available for future reassignment to other systems. This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field. Enter the lease time of the DHCP server. This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field. Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information. Select DNS Proxy if you have the DNS proxy service. The XMG redirects clients DNS queries to a DNS server for resolving domain names. Select Static if you have the IP address of a DNS server. This field is only available when you select Static in the DNS field. Enter the first and second DNS

(Domain Name System) server IP addresses the XMG passes to the DHCP clients. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 114 Chapter 8 Home Networking DESCRIPTION Table 29 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued) LABEL LAN IPv6 Mode Setup IPv6 Active Link Local Address Type EUI64 Select Enable to activate the IPv6 mode and configure IPv6 settings on the XMG. Select this to have the XMG generate an interface ID for the LAN interfaces link-local address using the EUI-64 format. Manual Select this to manually enter an interface ID for the LAN interfaces link-local address. Lan Global Identifier Type EUI64 Select this to have the XMG generate an interface ID using the EUI-64 format for its global address . Manual Select this to manually enter an interface ID for the LAN interfaces global IPv6 address. LAN IPv6 Prefix Setup Delegate prefix from WAN Static MLD Snooping Active MLD Mode LAN IPv6 Address Assign Setup LAN IPv6 DNS Assign Setup Select this option to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the service provider or an uplink router. Select this option to configure a fixed IPv6 address for the XMGs LAN IPv6 address. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD hosts who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network. Select Enable to activate MLD Snooping on the XMG. This allows the XMG to check MLD packets passing through it and learn the multicast group membership. It helps reduce multicast traffic. Select Standard Mode to allow the XMG to forward MLD packets only to ports that want to receive it. Select MLD Mode to allow the XMG to block MLD packets for a specific multicast group. Select how you want to obtain an IPv6 address:

Stateless: The XMG uses IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration. RADVD (Router Advertisement Daemon) is enabled to have the XMG send IPv6 prefix information in router advertisements periodically and in response to router solicitations. DHCPv6 server is disabled. Stateful: The XMG uses IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration. The DHCPv6 server is enabled to have the XMG act as a DHCPv6 server and pass IPv6 addresses to DHCPv6 clients. Stateless and Stateful: The XMG uses both IPv6 stateless and stateful autoconfiguration. The LAN IPv6 clients can obtain IPv6 addresses either through router advertisements or through DHCPv6. Select how the XMG provide DNS server and domain name information to the clients:

From Router Advertisement: The XMG provides DNS information through router advertisements. From DHCPv6 Server: The XMG provides DNS information through DHCPv6. From RA & DHCPv6 Server: The XMG provides DNS information through both router advertisements and DHCPv6. DHCPv6 Configuration DHCPv6 Active This shows the status of the DHCPv6. DHCPv6 Server displays if you configured the XMG to act as a DHCPv6 server which assigns IPv6 addresses and/or DNS information to clients. This shows whether RADVD is enabled or not. IPv6 Router Advertisement State RADVD Active IPv6 DNS Values IPv6 DNS Server 1-3 Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns IPv6 DNS server information. Select User-Defined if you have the IPv6 address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server IPv6 addresses the XMG passes to the DHCP clients. Select None if you do not want to configure IPv6 DNS servers. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 115 Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 29 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued) LABEL DNS Query Scenario DESCRIPTION Select how the XMG handles clients DNS information requests. IPv4/IPv6 DNS Server: The XMG forwards the requests to both the IPv4 and IPv6 DNS servers and sends clients the first DNS information it receives. IPv6 DNS Server Only: The XMG forwards the requests to the IPv6 DNS server and sends clients the DNS information it receives. the DNS information it receives. IPv4 DNS Server Only: The XMG forwards the requests to the IPv4 DNS server and sends clients IPv6 DNS Server First: The XMG forwards the requests to the IPv6 DNS server first and then the IPv4 DNS server. Then it sends clients the first DNS information it receives. IPv4 DNS Server First: The XMG forwards the requests to the IPv4 DNS server first and then the IPv6 DNS server. Then it sends clients the first DNS information it receives. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 8.3 The Static DHCP Screen This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. Use this screen to change your XMGs static DHCP settings. Click Network Setting > Home Networking >

Static DHCP to open the following screen. Figure 51 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new static DHCP entry. Table 30 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP LABEL Static DHCP Configuration

#

Status MAC Address This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the client is connected to the XMG. The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local Area Network) is unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation). IP Address Modify A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address. This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above. Click the Edit icon to have the IP address field editable and change it. Click the Delete icon to delete a static DHCP entry. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the selected entry. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 116 Chapter 8 Home Networking If you click Static DHCP Configuration in the Static DHCP screen or the Edit icon next to a static DHCP entry, the following screen displays. Figure 52 Static DHCP: Static DHCP Configuration/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 31 Static DHCP: Static DHCP Configuration/Edit LABEL Active Group Name DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate the connection between the client and the XMG. Select the interface group name for which you want to configure static DHCP settings. See Chapter 14 on page 171 for how to create a new interface group. This field displays IPv4 for the type of the DHCP IP address. At the time of writing, it is not allowed to select other type. Select a device or computer from the drop-down list or select Manual Input to manually enter a devices MAC address and IP address in the following fields. If you select Manual Input, enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN. If you select Manual Input, enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. IP Type Select Device Info MAC Address IP Address OK Cancel 8.4 The UPnP Screen Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use. See page 111 for more information on UPnP. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 117 Chapter 8 Home Networking Use the following screen to configure the UPnP settings on your XMG. Click Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP to display the screen shown next. Figure 53 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 32 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP LABEL UPnP State UPnP DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the XMG's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator). UPnP NAT-T State UPnP NAT-T

#

Description Destination IP Address External Port Internal Port Protocol Apply Cancel Select Enable to allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically configure the XMG so that they can communicate through the XMG by using NAT traversal. UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device; this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application. The table below displays the NAT port forwarding rules added automatically by UPnP NAT-T. This is the index number of the UPnP NAT-T connection. This is the description of the UPnP NAT-T connection. This is the IP address of the other connected UPnP-enabled device. This is the external port number that identifies the service. This is the internal port number that identifies the service. This is the transport layer protocol used for the service. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 8.4.1 Turning On UPnP in Windows 7 Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows 7. UPnP server is installed in Windows 7. Activate UPnP on the XMG. Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the XMG. Turn on your computer and the XMG. 1 Click the start icon, Control Panel and then the Network and Sharing Center. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 118 Chapter 8 Home Networking 2 Click Change Advanced Sharing Settings. 3 Select Turn on network discovery and click Save Changes. Network discovery allows your computer to find other computers and devices on the network and other computers on the network to find your computer. This makes it easier to share files and printers. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 119 Chapter 8 Home Networking 8.5 The Additional Subnet Screen Use the Additional Subnet screen to configure IP alias and public static IP. IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface. The XMG supports multiple logical LAN interfaces via its physical Ethernet interface with the XMG itself as the gateway for the LAN network. When you use IP alias, you can also configure firewall rules to control access to the LAN's logical network (subnet). If your ISP provides the Public LAN service, the XMG may use an LAN IP address that can be accessed from the WAN. Click Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet to display the screen shown next. Figure 54 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 33 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet LABEL IP Alias Setup Group Name DESCRIPTION Active IPv4 Address Subnet Mask Public LAN Active IPv4 Address Subnet Mask Offer Public IP by DHCP Enable ARP Proxy Select the interface group name for which you want to configure the IP alias settings. See Chapter 14 on page 171 for how to create a new interface group. Select Enable to configure a LAN network for the XMG. Enter the IP address of your XMG in dotted decimal notation. Enter the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example 255.255.255.0

(factory default). Select Enable to enable the Public LAN feature. Your ISP must support Public LAN and Static IP. Enter the public IP address provided by your ISP. Enter the public IPv4 subnet mask provided by your ISP. Select Enable to enable the XMG to provide public IP addresses by DHCP server. Select Enable to enable the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) proxy. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 120 Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 33 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet (continued) LABEL Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 8.6 The STB Vendor ID Screen Set Top Box (STB) devices with dynamic IP addresses sometimes dont renew their IP addresses before the lease time expires. This could lead to IP address conflicts if the STB continues to use an IP address that gets assigned to another device. Use this screen to configure the Vendor IDs of connected STBs, which have the XMG automatically created static DHCP entries for them when they request IP addresses. Click Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID to open this screen. Figure 55 Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 34 Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID LABEL Vendor ID 1~5 DESCRIPTION These are STBs Vendor Class Identifiers (DHCP option 60). A Vendor Class Identifier is usually used to inform the DHCP server a DHCP clients vendor and functionality. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Apply Cancel 8.7 The Wake on LAN Screen Use this screen to turn on a device on the LAN network. To use this feature, the remote device must also support Wake On LAN. You need to know the MAC address of the LAN device. It may be on a label on the device or in its documentation. Click Network Setting > Home Networking > Wake on LAN to open this screen. Figure 56 Network Setting > Home Networking > Wake on LAN XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 121 Chapter 8 Home Networking The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 35 Network Setting > Home Networking > Wake on LAN LABEL Wake by Address DESCRIPTION Select Manual and enter the IP address or MAC address of the device to turn it on remotely. The drop-down list also lists the IP addresses that can be found in the XMGs ARP table. Select an IP address and it will then automatically update the IP address and MAC address in the following fields. Enter the IPv4 IP address of the device to turn it on. Enter the MAC address of the device to turn it on. A MAC address consists of six hexadecimal character pairs. Click this to send a wake up packet to wake up the specified device. IP Address MAC Address Wake up 8.8 The TFTP Server Name Screen Use the TFTP Server Name screen to set the TFTP server address which is passed to the clients using DHCP option 66. The DHCP clients in the XMG local network, such as STB devices that support the TFTP booting mechanism, can then use the TFTP server address or domain name for initial system settings download. RFC 2132 defines the option 66 open standard. DHCP option 66 carries the IP address or the domain name of a single TFTP server. Click Network Setting > Home Networking > TFTP Server Name to open this screen. Figure 57 Network Setting > Home Networking > TFTP Server Name The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 36 Network Setting > Home Networking > TFTP Server Name LABEL TFTP Server Name Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. DESCRIPTION Enter the IP address or the domain name of a single TFTP server. 8.9 Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 8.9.1 LANs, WANs and the XMG The actual physical connection determines whether the XMG ports are LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 122 Chapter 8 Home Networking Figure 58 LAN and WAN IP Addresses LAN WAN 8.9.2 DHCP Setup DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the XMG as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the XMG provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. IP Pool Setup The XMG is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool). See the product specifications in the appendices. Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers. 8.9.3 DNS Server Addresses DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask. There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses. The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in the DHCP Setup screen. Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of IPCP (IP Control Protocol) after the connection is up. If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS servers, chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation. The XMG supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature. Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions. It does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers, make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the DHCP Setup screen. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 123 CHAPTER 9 Routing 9.1 Overview The XMG usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the XMG send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes. For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the XMGs LAN interface. The XMG routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the XMGs default gateway (R1). You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN. Figure 59 Example of Routing Topology A R3 LAN WAN R1 R2 9.2 The Routing Screen Use this screen to view and configure the static route rules on the XMG. Click Network Setting > Routing

> Static Route to open the following screen. Figure 60 Network Setting > Routing > Static Route XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 124 Chapter 9 Routing The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 37 Network Setting > Routing > Static Route LABEL Add new static route

#

Status DESCRIPTION Click this to configure a new static route. Name Destination IP Subnet Mask Gateway Interface Modify This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the static route is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this route is active. A gray bulb signifies that this route is not active. This is the name that describes or identifies this route. This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination. This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. This is the WAN interface used for this static route. Click the Edit icon to edit the static route on the XMG. Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the XMG. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route. 9.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route Use this screen to add or edit a static route. Click Add new static route in the Routing screen or the Edit icon next to the static route you want to edit. The screen shown next appears. Figure 61 Routing: Add/Edit XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 125 Chapter 9 Routing The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 38 Routing: Add/Edit LABEL Active DESCRIPTION This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route. Select Enable to activate the static route. Select Disable to deactivate this static route without having to delete the entry. Enter a descriptive name for the static route. Select whether your IP type is IPv4 or IPv6. Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 network address of the final destination. If you are using IPv4 and need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID. Enter the IP subnet mask here. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. If you want to use the gateway IP address, select Enable. Enter the IP address of the gateway. Select the WAN interface you want to use for this static route. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Route Name IP Type Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Use Gateway IP Address Gateway IP Address Use Interface OK Cancel 9.3 The DNS Route Screen Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes on the XMG. Click Network Setting > Routing > DNS Route to open the following screen. Figure 62 Network Setting > Routing > DNS Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new DNS route. Table 39 Network Setting > Routing > DNS Route LABEL Add New DNS Route

#

Status This is the index number of a DNS route. This field displays whether the DNS route is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this DNS route is active. A gray bulb signifies that this DNS route is not active. This is the host name or domain name of the DNS route entry. This is the WAN connection through which the XMG forwards DNS requests for this domain name. Domain Name WAN Interface XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 126 Chapter 9 Routing Table 39 Network Setting > Routing > DNS Route (continued) LABEL Subnet Mask Modify DESCRIPTION This is the subnet mask of the DNS route entry. Click the Edit icon to modify the DNS route. Click the Delete icon to delete the DNS route. 9.3.1 The DNS Route Add Screen You can manually add the XMGs DNS route entry. Click Add New DNS Route in the Network Setting >

Routing > DNS Route screen. The screen shown next appears. Figure 63 DNS Route Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 40 DNS Route Add LABEL Active Domain Name Subnet Mask WAN Interface OK Cancel DESCRIPTION Select to enable or disable this DNS route. Enter the domain name of the DNS route entry. Enter the subnet mask of the DNS route entry. Select the WAN connection through which the XMG forwards DNS requests for this domain name. Click this to save your changes. Click this to exit this screen without saving any changes. 9.4 The Policy Route Screen Traditionally, routing is based on the destination address only and the XMG takes the shortest path to forward a packet. Policy route allows the XMG to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator. Policy-based routing is applied to outgoing packets, prior to the normal routing. You can use source-based policy forwarding to direct traffic from different users through different connections or distribute traffic among multiple paths for load sharing. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 127 Chapter 9 Routing The Policy Route screen let you view and configure routing policies on the XMG. Click Network Setting >

Routing > Policy Route to open the following screen. Figure 64 Network Setting > Routing > Policy Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new policy forwarding rule. Table 41 Network Setting > Routing >Policy Route LABEL Add New Policy Route

#

Status Name Source IP Source Subnet Mask Protocol Source Port Source MAC Source Interface WAN Interface Modify This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the DNS route is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this DNS route is active. A gray bulb signifies that this DNS route is not active. This is the name of the rule. This is the source IP address. his is the source subnet mask address. This is the transport layer protocol. This is the source port number. This is the source MAC address. This is the interface from which the matched traffic is sent. This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed. Click the Edit icon to edit this policy. Click the Delete icon to remove a policy from the XMG. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the policy. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 128 Chapter 9 Routing 9.4.1 Add/Edit Policy Route Click Add New Policy Route in the Policy Route screen or click the Edit icon next to a policy. Use this screen to configure the required information for a policy route. Figure 65 Policy Route: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Select to enable or disable this policy route. Enter a descriptive name of up to 8 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces. Enter the source IP address. Table 42 Policy Route: Add/Edit LABEL Active Route Name Source IP Address Source Subnet Mask Protocol Source Port Source MAC Source Interface Type the name of the interface from which the matched traffic is sent. WAN Interface Select the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP). Enter the source port number. Enter the source MAC address. Enter the source subnet mask address. Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent. You must have the WAN interface(s) already configured in the Broadband screens. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. OK Cancel 9.5 RIP Routing Information Protocol (RIP, RFC 1058 and RFC 1389) allows a device to exchange routing information with other routers. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 129 Chapter 9 Routing 9.5.1 The RIP Screen Click Network Setting > Routing > RIP to open the RIP screen. Figure 66 RIP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 43 RIP LABEL

#

Interface Version Operation Enable Disable Default Gateway Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION This is the index of the interface in which the RIP setting is used. This is the name of the interface in which the RIP setting is used. The RIP version controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the XMG sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP version 1 is universally supported but RIP version 2 carries more information. RIP version 1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual network topology. Select Passive to have the XMG update the routing table based on the RIP packets received from neighbors but not advertise its route information to other routers in this interface. Select Active to have the XMG advertise its route information and also listen for routing updates from neighboring routers. Select the check box to activate the settings. Select the check box to set the XMG to not send the route information to the default gateway. Click Apply to save your changes back to the XMG. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 130 CHAPTER 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.1 Overview Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a networks ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-on-demand. Configure QoS on the XMG to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network performance. Setting up QoS involves these steps:

1 Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows. 2 Assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow. The XMG assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets assigned a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion, allowing time-

sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both those that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in delay) such as Voice over IP (VoIP) or Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video. This chapter contains information about configuring QoS and editing classifiers. 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General screen to enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth (Section 10.3 on page 133). Use the Queue Setup screen to configure QoS queue assignment (Section 10.4 on page 134). Use the Classification Setup screen to add, edit or delete QoS classifiers (Section 10.5 on page 137). Use the Shaper Setup screen to limit outgoing traffic transmission rate on the selected interface

(Section 10.6 on page 141). Use the Policer Setup screen to control incoming traffic transmission rate and bursts (Section 10.7 on page 142). XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 131 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. QoS versus Cos QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types. CoS technologies include IEEE 802.1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ (Differentiated Services or DS). IEEE 802.1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header, while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS field, which replaces the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. Tagging and Marking In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) value, IEEE 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet. When the packet passes through a compatible network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker. Traffic Shaping Bursty traffic may cause network congestion. Traffic shaping regulates packets to be transmitted with a pre-configured data transmission rate using buffers (or queues). Your XMG uses the Token Bucket algorithm to allow a certain amount of large bursts while keeping a limit at the average rate. Traffic Rate Traffic Rate c i f f a r T c i f f a r T Time Time

(Before Traffic Shaping)

(After Traffic Shaping) XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 132 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Traffic Policing Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the basis of user-defined criteria. Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user-defined criteria and identify it as either conforming, exceeding or violating the criteria. Traffic Rate Traffic Rate c i f f a r T c i f f a r T Time Time

(Before Traffic Policing)

(After Traffic Policing) The XMG supports three incoming traffic metering algorithms: Token Bucket Filter (TBF), Single Rate Two Color Maker (srTCM), and Two Rate Two Color Marker (trTCM). You can specify actions which are performed on the colored packets. See Section 10.8 on page 144 for more information on each metering algorithm. 10.3 The Quality of Service General Screen Click Network Setting > QoS > General to open the screen as shown next. Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth. See Section 10.1 on page 131 for more information. Figure 67 Network Settings > QoS > General XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 133 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 44 Network Setting > QoS > General LABEL QoS WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth DESCRIPTION Select the Enable check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance. Enter the amount of upstream bandwidth for the WAN interfaces that you want to allocate using QoS. The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interfaces actual transmission speed. For example, set the WAN interfaces speed to 100000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 100 Mbps. LAN Managed Downstream Bandwidth Upstream Traffic Priority Assigned by You can set this number higher than the interfaces actual transmission speed. The XMG uses up to 95% of the DSL ports actual upstream transmission speed even if you set this number higher than the DSL ports actual transmission speed. You can also set this number lower than the interfaces actual transmission speed. This will cause the XMG to not use some of the interfaces available bandwidth. If you leave this field blank, the XMG automatically sets this number to be 95% of the WAN interfaces actual upstream transmission speed. Enter the amount of downstream bandwidth for the LAN interfaces (including WLAN) that you want to allocate using QoS. The recommendation is to set this speed to match the WAN interfaces actual transmission speed. For example, set the LAN managed downstream bandwidth to 100000 kbps if you use a 100 Mbps wired Ethernet WAN connection. You can also set this number lower than the WAN interfaces actual transmission speed. This will cause the XMG to not use some of the interfaces available bandwidth. If you leave this field blank, the XMG automatically sets this to the LAN interfaces maximum supported connection speed. Select how the XMG assigns priorities to various upstream traffic flows. None: Disables auto priority mapping and has the XMG put packets into the queues according to your classification rules. Traffic which does not match any of the classification rules is mapped into the default queue with the lowest priority. Ethernet Priority: Automatically assign priority based on the IEEE 802.1p priority level. IP Precedence: Automatically assign priority based on the first three bits of the TOS field in the IP header. Packet Length: Automatically assign priority based on the packet size. Smaller packets get higher priority since control, signaling, VoIP, internet gaming, or other real-time packets are usually small while larger packets are usually best effort data packets like file transfers. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 10.4 The Queue Setup Screen Click Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup to open the screen as shown next. Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 134 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Figure 68 Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this button to create a new queue entry. Table 45 Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup LABEL Add New Queue

#

Status Name Interface Priority Weight Buffer Management Rate Limit Modify This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the queue is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this queue is active. A gray bulb signifies that this queue is not active. This shows the descriptive name of this queue. This shows the name of the XMGs interface through which traffic in this queue passes. This shows the priority of this queue. This shows the weight of this queue. This shows the queue management algorithm used for this queue. Queue management algorithms determine how the XMG should handle packets when it receives too many (network congestion). This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue. Click the Edit icon to edit the queue. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing queue. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 135 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue Click Add New Queue or the edit icon in the Queue Setup screen to configure a queue. Figure 69 Queue Setup: Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 46 Queue Setup: Add DESCRIPTION LABEL Select to enable or disable this queue. Active Name Enter the descriptive name of this queue. Select the interface to which this queue is applied. Interface Priority Weight Buffer Management Rate Limit OK Cancel This field is read-only if you are editing the queue. Select the priority level (from 1 to 7) of this queue. The smaller the number, the higher the priority level. Traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is congested. Select the weight (from 1 to 8) of this queue. If two queues have the same priority level, the XMG divides the bandwidth across the queues according to their weights. Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than queues with smaller weights. This field displays Drop Tail (DT). Drop Tail (DT) is a simple queue management algorithm that allows the XMG buffer to accept as many packets as it can until it is full. Once the buffer is full, new packets that arrive are dropped until there is space in the buffer again (packets are transmitted out of it). Specify the maximum transmission rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic on this queue. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 136 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.5 The Classification Setup Screen Use this screen to add, edit or delete QoS classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number, destination port number or incoming interface. For example, you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to form a flow. You can give different priorities to traffic that the XMG forwards out through the WAN interface. Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications. Click Network Setting > QoS > Classification Setup to open the following screen. Figure 70 Network Setting > QoS > Classification Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 47 Network Setting > QoS > Classification Setup LABEL Add New Classification Order Status DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new classifier. Class Name Classification Criteria DSCP Mark 802.1P Mark VLAN ID Tag To Queue Modify This is the index number of the entry. The classifiers are applied in order of their numbering. This field displays whether the classifier is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this classifier is active. A gray bulb signifies that this classifier is not active. This is the name of the classifier. This shows criteria specified in this classifier, for example the interface from which traffic of this class should come and the source MAC address of traffic that matches this classifier. This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier. This is the IEEE 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic of this classifier. This is the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic of this classifier. This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put. Click the Edit icon to edit the classifier. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. 10.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class Click Add New Classification in the Classification Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a classifier to open the following screen. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 137 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Figure 71 Classification Setup: Add/Edit XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 138 Subnet Mask Enter the source subnet mask. Port Range Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 48 Classification Setup: Add/Edit LABEL Step1: Class Configuration Active Class Name Classification Order Step2: Criteria Configuration From Interface Select to enable or disable this classifier. Enter a descriptive name of up to 15 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces. Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier to move the classifier to the number you selected after clicking Apply. Select Last to put this rule in the back of the classifier list. If you want to classify the traffic by an ingress interface, select an interface from the From Interface drop-down list box. Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic. If you select IP, you also need to configure source or destination MAC address, IP address, DHCP options, DSCP value or the protocol type. If you select 802.1Q, you can configure an 802.1p priority level. Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address. If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source. Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet. Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packets MAC address should match. Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffics MAC address should match. Enter 0 for the bit(s) of the matched traffics MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. Select the check box and enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address. If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the destination. Select the check box and enter the destination MAC address of the packet. Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packets MAC address should match. Enter f for each bit of the specified destination MAC address that the traffics MAC address should match. Enter 0 for the bit(s) of the matched traffics MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 139 Ether Type Source Address MAC MAC Mask Exclude Destination Address MAC MAC Mask Exclude Others Subnet Mask Enter the destination subnet mask. Port Range Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 48 Classification Setup: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Service IP Protocol DHCP IP Packet Length DSCP 802.1P VLAN ID TCP ACK Exclude This field simplifies classifier configuration by allowing you to select a predefined application. When you select a predefined application, you do not configure the rest of the filter fields. This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and select the protocol (service type) from TCP, UDP, ICMP or IGMP. If you select User defined, enter the protocol (service type) number. This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and select a DHCP option. If you select Vendor Class ID (DHCP Option 60), enter the Vendor Class Identifier (Option 60) of the matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware or firmware. If you select Client ID (DHCP Option 61), enter the Identity Association IDentifier (IAD Option 61) of the matched traffic, such as the MAC address of the device. If you select User Class ID (DHCP Option 77), enter a string that identifies the users category or application type in the matched DHCP packets. If you select Vendor Specific Info (DHCP Option 125), enter the vendor specific information of the matched traffic, such as the product class, model name, and serial number of the device. This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length (from 46 to 1500) in the fields provided. This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the field provided. This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field. Select this option and select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from the drop-down list box.

"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest. This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field. Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number. This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. If you select this option, the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK (Acknowledge) flag. Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. If you select Remark, enter a DSCP value with which the XMG replaces the DSCP field in the packets. If you select Unchange, the XMG keep the DSCP field in the packets. Select a priority level with which the XMG replaces the IEEE 802.1p priority field in the packets. If you select Unchange, the XMG keep the 802.1p priority field in the packets. If you select Remark, enter a VLAN ID number with which the XMG replaces the VLAN ID of the frames. If you select Remove, the XMG deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before forwarding them out. If you select Add, the XMG treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second VLAN ID. If you select Unchange, the XMG keep the VLAN ID in the packets. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 140 Step3: Packet Modification DSCP Mark 802.1P Mark VLAN ID Tag Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Select a WAN interface through which traffic of this class will be forwarded out. If you select Unchange, the XMG forward traffic of this class according to the default routing table. DESCRIPTION Table 48 Classification Setup: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL Step4: Class Routing Forward to Interface Step5: Outgoing Queue Selection To Queue Index Select a queue that applies to this class. You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. OK Cancel 10.6 The QoS Shaper Setup Screen This screen shows that you can use the token bucket algorithm to allow a certain amount of large bursts while keeping a limit for processing outgoing traffic at the average rate. Click Network Setting > QoS >

Shaper Setup. The screen appears as shown. Figure 72 Network Setting > QoS > Shaper Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. Table 49 Network Setting > QoS > Shaper Setup LABEL Add New Shaper

#

Status Outgoing Interface Rate Limit (kbps) Modify This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the shaper is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this policer is active. A gray bulb signifies that this shaper is not active. This shows the name of the XMG's interface through which traffic in this shaper applies. This shows the average rate limit of traffic bursts for this shaper. Click the Edit icon to edit the shaper. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing shaper. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 141 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Shaper Click Add New Shaper in the Shaper Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a shaper to show the following screen. Figure 73 Shaper Setup: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 50 Shaper Setup: Add/Edit LABEL Active Interface Rate Limit OK Cancel DESCRIPTION Select to enable or disable this shaper. Select the XMG's interface through which traffic in this shaper applies Enter the average rate limit of traffic bursts for this shaper. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 10.7 The QoS Policer Setup Screen Use this screen to view QoS policers that allow you to limit the transmission rate of incoming traffic and apply actions, such as drop, pass, or modify the DSCP value for matched traffic. Click Network Setting >

QoS > Policer Setup. The screen appears as shown. Figure 74 Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 51 Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup LABEL Add new Policer Click this to create a new entry.

#

This is the index number of the entry. DESCRIPTION XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 142 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 51 Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup (continued) LABEL Status DESCRIPTION This field displays whether the policer is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this policer is active. A gray bulb signifies that this policer is not active. This field displays the descriptive name of this policer. This field displays the name of a QoS classifier This field displays the type of QoS metering algorithm used in this policer. These are the rates and burst sizes against which the policer checks the traffic of the member QoS classes. This shows the how the policer has the XMG treat different types of traffic belonging to the policers member QoS classes. Click the Edit icon to edit the policer. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing policer. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. Name Regulated Classes Meter Type Rule Action Modify 10.7.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer Click Add New Policer in the Policer Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a policer to show the following screen. Figure 75 Policer Setup: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 52 Policer Setup: Add/Edit LABEL Active Name DESCRIPTION Select to enable or disable this policer. Enter the descriptive name of this policer. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 143 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 52 Policer Setup: Add/Edit LABEL Meter Type DESCRIPTION This shows the traffic metering algorithm used in this policer. The Simple Token Bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. Each token represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes which is also the bucket size. The Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM) is based on the token bucket filter and identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate (CIR), the Committed Burst Size

(CBS) and the Excess Burst Size (EBS). The Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM) is based on the token bucket filter and identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate (CIR) and the Peak Information Rate (PIR). Specify the committed rate. When the incoming traffic rate of the member QoS classes is less than the committed rate, the device applies the conforming action to the traffic. Specify the committed burst size for packet bursts. This must be equal to or less than the peak burst size (two rate three color) or excess burst size (single rate three color) if it is also configured. This is the maximum size of the (first) token bucket in a traffic metering algorithm. Specify what the XMG does for packets within the committed rate and burst size (green-marked packets). Pass: Send the packets without modification. DSCP Mark: Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark value to use. Specify what the XMG does for packets that exceed the excess burst size or peak rate and burst size (red-marked packets). Drop: Discard the packets. DSCP Mark: Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark value to use. The packets may be dropped if there is congestion on the network. Committed Rate Committed Burst Size Conforming Action Non-

Conforming Action Available Class Selected Class OK Cancel Select a QoS classifier to apply this QoS policer to traffic that matches the QoS classifier. Highlight a QoS classifier in the Available Class box and use the > button to move it to the Selected Class box. To remove a QoS classifier from the Selected Class box, select it and use the < button. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 10.8 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the XMG features described in this chapter. IEEE 802.1Q Tag The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the 12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 144 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates the 802.1p). Table 53 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL Level 7 Level 6 TRAFFIC TYPE Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages. Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay). Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter. Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems Network Architecture) transactions. Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay. This is for spare bandwidth. This is typically used for non-critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users. Typically used for best-effort traffic. Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1 Level 0 DiffServ QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow are given the same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to different packet types. DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going. DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new Differentiated Services (DS) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field. DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping. DSCP (6 bits) Unused (2 bits) The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 145 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) IP Precedence Similar to IEEE 802.1p prioritization at layer-2, you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a layer-3 network. IP precedence uses three bits of the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. There are eight classes of services (ranging from zero to seven) in IP precedence. Zero is the lowest priority level and seven is the highest. Automatic Priority Queue Assignment If you enable QoS on the XMG, the XMG can automatically base on the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP precedence and/or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class. The following table shows you the internal layer-2 and layer-3 QoS mapping on the XMG. On the XMG, traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested. Table 54 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping IP PACKET LENGTH

(BYTE)

>1100 250~1100

<250 PRIORITY QUEUE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LAYER 2 IEEE 802.1P USER PRIORITY

(ETHERNET PRIORITY) 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 LAYER 3 TOS (IP PRECEDENCE) 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DSCP 000000 000000 001110 001100 001010 001000 010110 010100 010010 010000 011110 011100 011010 011000 100110 100100 100010 100000 101110 101000 110000 111000 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 146 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Token Bucket The token bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. The bucket stores tokens, each of which represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes which is also the bucket size, so the bucket can hold up to b tokens. Tokens are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate. The following shows how tokens work with packets:

A packet can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes). After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed from the bucket. If there are no tokens in the bucket, the XMG stops transmitting until enough tokens are generated. If not enough tokens are available, the XMG treats the packet in either one of the following ways:

In traffic shaping:

Holds it in the queue until enough tokens are available in the bucket. In traffic policing:

Drops it. Transmits it but adds a DSCP mark. The XMG may drop these marked packets if the network is overloaded. Configure the bucket size to be equal to or less than the amount of the bandwidth that the interface can support. It does not help if you set it to a bucket size over the interfaces capability. The smaller the bucket size, the lower the data transmission rate and that may cause outgoing packets to be dropped. A larger transmission rate requires a big bucket size. For example, use a bucket size of 10 kbytes to get the transmission rate up to 10 Mbps. Single Rate Three Color Marker The Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM, defined in RFC 2697) is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to one user-defined rate, the Committed Information Rate (CIR), and two burst sizes: the Committed Burst Size (CBS) and Excess Burst Size (EBS). The srTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green. The srTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (CBS and EBS). Tokens are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate, called Committed Information Rate (CIR). When the first bucket (CBS) is full, new tokens overflow into the second bucket (EBS). All packets are evaluated against the CBS. If a packet does not exceed the CBS it is marked green. Otherwise it is evaluated against the EBS. If it is below the EBS then it is marked yellow. If it exceeds the EBS then it is marked red. The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in srTCM:

A packet arrives. The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes). After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed from the CBS bucket. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 147 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) If there are not enough tokens in the CBS bucket, the XMG checks the EBS bucket. The packet is marked yellow if there are sufficient tokens in the EBS bucket. Otherwise, the packet is marked red. No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped. Two Rate Three Color Marker The Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM, defined in RFC 2698) is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to two user-defined rates: the Committed Information Rate (CIR) and the Peak Information Rate (PIR). The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets are admitted to the network. The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR. CIR and PIR values are based on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider and client. The trTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green. The trTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (Committed Burst Size (CBS) and Peak Burst Size (PBS)). Tokens are generated and added into the two buckets at the CIR and PIR respectively. All packets are evaluated against the PIR. If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red. Otherwise it is evaluated against the CIR. If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow. Finally, if it is below the CIR then it is marked green. The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in trTCM:

A packet arrives. If the number of tokens in the PBS bucket is less than the size of the packet (in bytes), the packet is marked red and may be dropped regardless of the CBS bucket. No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped. If the PBS bucket has enough tokens, the XMG checks the CBS bucket. The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes). Otherwise, the packet is marked yellow. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 148 CHAPTER 11 Network Address Translation

(NAT) 11.1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the XMG. NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network. 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Port Forwarding screen to configure forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network (Section 11.2 on page 150). Use the Applications screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network (Section 11.3 on page 153). Use the Port Triggering screen to add and configure the XMGs trigger port settings (Section 11.4 on page 154). Use the DMZ screen to configure a default server (Section 11.5 on page 157). Use the ALG screen to enable and disable the NAT and SIP (VoIP) ALG in the XMG (Section 11.6 on page 158). Use the Address Mapping screen to configure the XMG's address mapping settings (Section 11.7 on page 158). Use the Sessions screen to configure the XMG's maximum number of NAT sessions (Section 11.8 on page 160). 11.1.2 What You Need To Know Inside/Outside Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the XMG, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/Local Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 149 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) NAT In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Port Forwarding A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world. Finding Out More See Section 11.9 on page 161 for advanced technical information on NAT. 11.2 The Port Forwarding Screen Use the Port Forwarding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports. The most often used port numbers and services are shown in Appendix C on page 268. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes

(such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP. Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example) Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 150 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Figure 76 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A=192.168.1.33 LAN B=192.168.1.34 WAN 192.168.1.1 IP Address assigned by ISP C=192.168.1.3 D=192.168.1.36 Click Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding to open the following screen. See Appendix C on page 268 for port numbers commonly used for particular services. Figure 77 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 55 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding LABEL Add New Rule

#

Status DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new rule. This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the NAT rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active. This shows the services name. This shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. Service Name WAN Interface Server IP Address Start Port End Port Translation Start Port Translation End Port Protocol Modify This is the servers IP address. This is the first external port number that identifies a service. This is the last external port number that identifies a service. This is the first internal port number that identifies a service. This is the last internal port number that identifies a service. This shows the IP protocol supported by this virtual server, whether it is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. Click the Edit icon to edit this rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 151 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) 11.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding Click Add New Rule in the Port Forwarding screen or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to open the following screen. Figure 78 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 56 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit LABEL Active Service Name WAN Interface DESCRIPTION Select to enable or disable the rule. Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so on). Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled. Start Port Enter the original destination port for the packets. To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the End Port field. To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in the End Port field. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 152 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 56 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL End Port DESCRIPTION Enter the last port of the original destination port range. To forward only one port, enter the port number in the Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field. To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the Start Port field above. This shows the port number to which you want the XMG to translate the incoming port. For a range of ports, enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated. This shows the last port of the translated port range. Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here. Select the protocol supported by this virtual server. Choices are TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. Select this to allow the XMGs network to remotely turn on a device in the network. Enter the MAC address of the device that will be turned on by an XMGs network message. A MAC address consists of six hexadecimal character pairs. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Translation Start Port Translation End Port Server IP Address Protocol Wake up this target by Wake On Lan (WOL) MAC address of WOL device OK Cancel 11.3 The Applications Screen This screen provides a summary of all NAT applications and their configuration. In addition, this screen allows you to create new applications and/or remove existing ones. To access this screen, click Network Setting > NAT > Applications. The following screen appears. Figure 79 Network Setting > NAT > Applications The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new NAT application rule. Table 57 Network Setting > NAT > Applications LABEL Add New Application

#

Application Forwarded WAN Interface This is the index number of the entry. This field shows the type of application that the service forwards. This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 153 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Table 57 Network Setting > NAT > Applications (continued) LABEL Server IP Address Modify DESCRIPTION This field displays the destination IP address for the service. Click the Delete icon to delete the rule. 11.3.1 Add New Application This screen lets you create new NAT application rules. Click Add New Application in the Applications screen to open the following screen. Figure 80 Network Setting > NAT > Applications: Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Select the WAN interface that you want to apply this NAT rule to. Enter the inside IP address of the application here. Table 58 Network Setting > NAT > Applications: Add LABEL WAN Interface Server IP Address Application Category Application Forwarded View Rules Select the category of the application from the drop-down list box. Select a service from the drop-down list box and the XMG automatically configures the protocol, start, end, and map port number that define the service. Click this to display the configuration of the service that you have chosen in Application Fowarded. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. OK Cancel 11.4 The Port Triggering Screen Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service (coming in XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 154 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) from the server on the WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN). The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace the LAN computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP address. Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service. The XMG records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol (a "trigger" port). When the XMG's WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol ("open" port), the XMG forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request. After that computers connection for that service closes, another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner. This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application. For example:

Figure 81 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example 1 2 3 4 Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070). Port 7070 is a trigger port and causes the XMG to record Janes computer IP address. The XMG associates Jane's computer IP address with the "open" port range of 6970-7170. The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170. The XMG forwards the traffic to Janes computer IP address. 5 Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out. The XMG times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram Protocol) or two hours with TCP/IP (Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol). Click Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering to open the following screen. Use this screen to view your XMGs trigger port settings. Figure 82 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 155 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 59 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering LABEL Add New Rule

#

Status DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new rule. This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the port triggering rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active. This field displays the name of the service used by this rule. This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded. The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the XMG to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN. This is the first port number that identifies a service. This is the last port number that identifies a service. This is the trigger transport layer protocol. The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The XMG forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service. This is the first port number that identifies a service. This is the last port number that identifies a service. This is the open transport layer protocol. Click the Edit icon to edit this rule. Click the Delete icon to remove an existing rule. Service Name WAN Interface Trigger Start Port Trigger End Port Trigger Proto. Open Start Port Open End Port Open Proto. Modify 11.4.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule This screen lets you create new port triggering rules. Click Add new rule in the Port Triggering screen or click a rules Edit icon to open the following screen. Figure 83 Port Triggering: Add/Edit XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 156 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 60 Port Triggering: Configuration Add/Edit LABEL Active Service Name WAN Interface Trigger Start Port DESCRIPTION Select to enable or disable this rule. Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so on). Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port triggering rules. The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the XMG to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN. Trigger End Port Trigger Protocol Open Start Port Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The XMG forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service. Open End Port Open Protocol OK Cancel Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 11.5 The DMZ Screen In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding Setup screen. Figure 84 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 61 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ LABEL Default Server Address DESCRIPTION Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen. Note: If you do not assign a Default Server Address, the XMG discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 157 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) 11.6 The ALG Screen Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway (ALG). A SIP ALG allows SIP calls to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream. When the XMG registers with the SIP register server, the SIP ALG translates the XMGs private IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address. You do not need to use STUN or an outbound proxy if your XMG is behind a SIP ALG. Use this screen to enable and disable the ALGs in the XMG. To access this screen, click Network Setting >

NAT > ALG. Figure 85 Network Setting > NAT > ALG The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 62 Network Setting > NAT > ALG LABEL NAT ALG DESCRIPTION Enable this to make sure applications such as FTP and file transfer in IM applications work correctly with port-forwarding and address-mapping rules. Enable this to make sure SIP (VoIP) works correctly with port-forwarding and address-mapping rules. Enable this to have the XMG detect RTSP traffic and help build RTSP sessions through its NAT. The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet. Enable this to turn on the PPTP ALG on the XMG to detect PPTP traffic and help build PPTP sessions through the XMGs NAT. Enable this to turn on the IPsec ALG on the XMG to detect IPsec traffic and help build IPsec sessions through the XMGs NAT. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. SIP ALG RTSP ALG PPTP ALG IPSEC ALG Apply Cancel 11.7 The Address Mapping Screen Ordering your rules is important because the XMG applies the rules in the order that you specify. When a rule matches the current packet, the XMG takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored. Click Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping to display the following screen. Figure 86 Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 158 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 63 Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping LABEL Add new rule Set Local Start IP Local End IP DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new rule. This is the index number of the address mapping set. This is the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA). This is the ending Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local End IP address. This field is blank for One-to-One mapping types. This is the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for the Many-to-One mapping type. This is the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is blank for One-to-One and Many-to-

One mapping types. This is the address mapping type. One-to-One: This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type. Many-to-One: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), the XMG's Single User Account feature that previous routers supported only. Many-to-Many: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses. This is the WAN interface to which the address mapping rule applies. Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the address mapping rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing address mapping rule. Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action. Global Start IP Global End IP Type Wan Interface Name Modify 11.7.1 Add/Edit Address Mapping Rule To add or edit an address mapping rule, click Add new rule or the rules edit icon in the Address Mapping screen to display the screen shown next. Figure 87 Address Mapping: Add/Edit XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 159 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 64 Address Mapping: Add/Edit LABEL Rule Name Type DESCRIPTION Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so on). Choose the IP/port mapping type from one of the following. One-to-One: This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type. Many-to-One: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), the XMG's Single User Account feature that previous routers supported only. Many-to-Many: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses. Enter the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA). Enter the ending Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local End IP address. This field is blank for One-to-One mapping types. Enter the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for the Many-to-One mapping type. Enter the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is blank for One-to-One and Many-to-

One mapping types. Select a WAN interface to which the address mapping rule applies. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP WAN Interface OK Cancel 11.8 The Sessions Screen Use this screen to limit the number of concurrent NAT sessions a client can use. Click Network Setting >

NAT > Sessions to display the following screen. Figure 88 Network Setting > NAT > Sessions The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 65 Network Setting > NAT > Sessions LABEL MAX NAT Session Per Host DESCRIPTION Use this field to set a limit to the number of concurrent NAT sessions each client host can have. If only a few clients use peer to peer applications, you can raise this number to improve their performance. With heavy peer-to-peer application use, lower this number to ensure no single client uses too many of the available NAT sessions. Click this to save your changes on this screen. Click this to exit this screen without saving any changes. Apply Cancel XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 160 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) 11.9 Technical Reference This part contains more information regarding NAT. 11.9.1 NAT Definitions Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the XMG, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table summarizes this information. Table 66 NAT Definitions ITEM Inside Outside Local Global DESCRIPTION This refers to the host on the LAN. This refers to the host on the WAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN. NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host. 11.9.2 What NAT Does In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note that the IP address

(either local or global) of an outside host is never changed. The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP. In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Many-to-

One and Many-to-Many Overload mapping), NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your XMG filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT). XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 161 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) 11.9.3 How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many-to-One and Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The XMG keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this. Figure 89 How NAT Works LAN 192.168.1.13 192.168.1.12 SA 192.168.1.10 WAN NAT Table Inside Local IP Address 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.12 192.168.1.13 Inside Global IP Address IGA 1 IGA 2 IGA 3 IGA 4 SA IGA1 Inside Local Address (ILA) Inside Global Address (IGA) 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.10 11.9.4 NAT Application The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs (logical LANs using IP alias) behind the XMG can communicate with three distinct WAN networks. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 162 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Figure 90 NAT Application With IP Alias Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Please also refer to the Supporting CD for more examples and details on port forwarding and NAT. Table 67 Services and Port Numbers SERVICES ECHO FTP (File Transfer Protocol) SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) DNS (Domain Name System) Finger HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW, Web) POP3 (Post Office Protocol) NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol) SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) SNMP trap PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) Port Forwarding Example PORT NUMBER 7 21 25 53 79 80 110 119 161 162 1723 Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 163 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. Figure 91 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A=192.168.1.33 192.168.1.1 B=192.168.1.34 C=192.168.1.35 D=192.168.1.36 IP address assigned by ISP XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 164 CHAPTER 12 DNS 12.1 Overview DNS DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it. In addition to the system DNS server(s), each WAN interface (service) is set to have its own static or dynamic DNS server list. You can configure a DNS static route to forward DNS queries for certain domain names through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server(s). The XMG uses a system DNS server (in the order you specify in the Broadband screen) to resolve domain names that do not match any DNS routing entry. After the XMG receives a DNS reply from a DNS server, it creates a new entry for the resolved IP address in the routing table. Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address. First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name. The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key. 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the DNS Entry screen to view, configure, or remove DNS routes (Section 12.2 on page 166). Use the Dynamic DNS screen to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the XMG (Section 12.3 on page 167). 12.1.2 What You Need To Know DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 165 Chapter 12 DNS If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS. 12.2 The DNS Entry Screen Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes on the XMG. Click Network Setting > DNS to open the DNS Entry screen. Figure 92 Network Setting > DNS > DNS Entry The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new DNS entry. Table 68 Network Setting > DNS > DNS Entry LABEL Add New DNS Entry

#

Hostname IP Address Modify This is the index number of the entry. This indicates the host name or domain name. This indicates the IP address assigned to this computer. Click the Edit icon to edit the rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. 12.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry You can manually add or edit the XMGs DNS name and IP address entry. Click Add New DNS Entry in the DNS Entry screen or the Edit icon next to the entry you want to edit. The screen shown next appears. Figure 93 DNS Entry: Add/Edit XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 166 Chapter 12 DNS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 69 DNS Entry: Add/Edit DESCRIPTION LABEL Host Name Enter the host name of the DNS entry. Enter the IPv4 address of the DNS entry. IPv4 Address Click OK to save your changes. OK Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Cancel 12.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen Use this screen to change your XMGs DDNS. Click Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS. The screen appears as shown. Figure 94 Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 70 Network Setting > DNS > > Dynamic DNS LABEL Dynamic DNS Setup DESCRIPTION Dynamic DNS Service Provider Host Name Select Enable to use dynamic DNS. Select your Dynamic DNS service provider from the drop-down list box. Type the domain name assigned to your XMG by your Dynamic DNS provider. Username Password Dynamic DNS Status You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (","). Type your user name. Type the password assigned to you. User Authentication Result Last Updated Time This shows the last time the IP address the Dynamic DNS provider has associated with the This shows Success if the account is correctly set up with the Dynamic DNS provider account. Current Dynamic IP hostname was updated. This shows the IP address your Dynamic DNS provider has currently associated with the hostname. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 167 Chapter 12 DNS Table 70 Network Setting > DNS > > Dynamic DNS (continued) LABEL Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 168 CHAPTER 13 VLAN Group 13.1 Overview Virtual LAN IDs are used to identify different traffic types over the same physical link. In the following example, the XMG (DSL) can use VLAN IDs (VID) 100 and 200 to identify Video-on-

Demand and IPTV traffic respectively coming from the two VoD and IPTV multicast servers. The XMG

(DSL) can also tag outgoing requests to these servers with these VLAN IDs. Figure 95 VLAN Group Example 13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use these screens to group separate VLAN groups together to be treated as one VLAN group. 13.2 The VLAN Group Screen Click Network Setting > Vlan Group to open the following screen. Figure 96 Network Setting > Vlan Group The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 71 Network Setting > Vlan Group LABEL Add New Vlan Group

#

DESCRIPTION Click this button to create a new VLAN group. This is the index number of the VLAN group. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 169 Chapter 13 VLAN Group Table 71 Network Setting > Vlan Group (continued) LABEL Group Name VLAN ID Interfaces DESCRIPTION This shows the descriptive name of the VLAN group. This shows the unique ID number that identifies the VLAN group. This shows the LAN ports included in the VLAN group and if traffic leaving the port will be tagged with the VLAN ID. Click the Edit icon to change an existing VLAN group setting or click the Delete icon to remove the VLAN group. Modify 13.2.1 Add/Edit a VLAN Group Click the Add New VLAN Group button in the Vlan Group screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to create a new VLAN group. Figure 97 Add/Edit VLAN Group The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 72 Add/Edit VLAN Group LABEL VLAN Group Name VLAN ID DESCRIPTION Enter a name to identify this group. You can enter up to 30 characters. You can use letters, numbers, hyphens (-) and underscores (_). Spaces are not allowed. Enter a unique ID number, from 1 to 4,094, to identify this VLAN group. Outgoing traffic is tagged with this ID if Tx Tagging is selected below. Select Include to add the associated LAN interface to this VLAN group. Select Tx Tagging to tag outgoing traffic from the associated LAN port with the VLAN ID number entered above. Click OK to save your changes back to the XMG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. LAN OK Cancel XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 170 CHAPTER 14 Interface Grouping 14.1 Overview By default, all LAN and WAN interfaces on the XMG are in the same group and can communicate with each other. Create interface groups to have the XMG assign the IP addresses in different domains to different groups. Each group acts as an independent network on the XMG. This lets devices connected to an interface groups LAN interfaces communicate through the interface groups WAN or LAN interfaces but not other WAN or LAN interfaces. 14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Interface Grouping screens let you create multiple networks on the XMG (Section 14.2 on page 171). 14.2 The Interface Grouping Screen You can manually add a LAN interface to a new group. Alternatively, you can have the XMG automatically add the incoming traffic and the LAN interface on which traffic is received to an interface group when its DHCP Vendor ID option information matches one listed for the interface group. Use the LAN screen to configure the private IP addresses the DHCP server on the XMG assigns to the clients in the default and/or user-defined groups. If you set the XMG to assign IP addresses based on the clients DHCP Vendor ID option information, you must enable DHCP server and configure LAN TCP/IP settings for both the default and user-defined groups. See Chapter 8 on page 110 for more information. In the following example, the client that sends packets with the DHCP Vendor ID option set to MSFT 5.0

(meaning it is a Windows 2000 DHCP client) is assigned the IP address 192.168.2.2 and uses the WAN VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1 interface. Figure 98 Interface Grouping Application Default: ETH 2~4 192.168.1.x/24 192.168.2.x/24 DHCP Vendor ID option: MSFT 5.0 eth10.0 VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 171 Chapter 14 Interface Grouping Click Network Setting > Interface Grouping to open the following screen. Figure 99 Network Setting > Interface Grouping The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this button to create a new interface group. Table 73 Network Setting > Interface Grouping LABEL Add New Interface Group Group Name WAN Interface LAN Interfaces Criteria Modify This shows the descriptive name of the group. This shows the WAN interfaces in the group. This shows the LAN interfaces in the group. This shows the filtering criteria for the group. Click the Delete icon to remove the group. 14.2.1 Interface Group Configuration Click the Add New Interface Group button in the Interface Grouping screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to create a new interface group. Note: An interface can belong to only one group at a time. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 172 Chapter 14 Interface Grouping Figure 100 Interface Group Configuration The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 74 Interface Group Configuration LABEL Group Name WAN Interfaces used in the grouping Grouped LAN Interfaces Available LAN Interfaces DESCRIPTION Enter a name to identify this group. You can enter up to 30 characters. You can use letters, numbers, hyphens (-) and underscores (_). Spaces are not allowed. Select the WAN interface this group uses. The group can have up to one PTM interface, up to one ATM interface, up to one ETH interface, and and up to one WWAN interface. Select None to not add a WAN interface to this group. Select one or more LAN interfaces (Ethernet LAN, HPNA or wireless LAN) on the Available LAN Interfaces list and use the left arrow to move them to the interface list on the left to add the interfaces to this group. To remove a LAN or wireless LAN interface from the interface list on the left, use the right-facing arrow. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 173 Chapter 14 Interface Grouping Table 74 Interface Group Configuration (continued) LABEL Automatically Add Clients With the following DHCP Vendor IDs

#

Filter Criteria WildCard Support Modify OK Cancel Click the Modify icon to edit this rule on the XMG. Click OK to save your changes back to the XMG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. DESCRIPTION Click Add to identify LAN hosts to add to the interface group by criteria such as the type of the hardware or firmware. See Section 14.2.2 on page 174 for more information. This shows the index number of the rule. This shows the filtering criteria. The LAN interface on which the matched traffic is received will belong to this group automatically. This shows if wildcard on DHCP option 60 is enabled. 14.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria Click the Add button in the Interface Grouping Configuration screen to open the following screen. Figure 101 Interface Grouping Criteria The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 75 Interface Grouping Criteria LABEL Source MAC Address DHCP Option 60 DESCRIPTION Select this option and enter the source MAC address of the packet. Select this option and enter the Vendor Class Identifier (Option 60) of the matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware or firmware. Select this option to be able to use wildcards in the Vendor Class Identifier configured for DHCP option 60. Select this and enter the device identity of the matched traffic. Select this and enter vendor specific information of the matched traffic. Enable wildcard DHCP Option 61 DHCP Option 125 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 174 Chapter 14 Interface Grouping Table 75 Interface Grouping Criteria (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Enter the vendors 32-bit enterprise number registered with the IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority). Specify the vendors OUI (Organization Unique Identifier). It is usually the first three bytes of the MAC address. Enter the serial number of the device. Enterprise Number Manufactur er OUI Serial Number Product Class Enter the product class of the device. VLAN Group OK Cancel Select this and the VLAN group of the matched traffic from the drop-down list box. Click OK to save your changes back to the XMG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 175 CHAPTER 15 USB Service 15.1 Overview You can share files on a USB memory stick or hard drive connected to your XMG with users on your network. The following figure is an overview of the XMGs file server feature. Computers A and B can access files on a USB device (C) which is connected to the XMG. Figure 102 File Sharing Overview B C A The XMG will not be able to join the workgroup if your local area network has restrictions set up that do not allow devices to join a workgroup. In this case, contact your network administrator. 15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the File Sharing screen to enable file-sharing server (Section 15.1.3 on page 177). Use the Media Server screen to enable or disable the sharing of media files (Section 15.3 on page 179). 15.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 176 Chapter 15 USB Service 15.1.2.1 About File Sharing Workgroup name This is the name given to a set of computers that are connected on a network and share resources such as a printer or files. Windows automatically assigns the workgroup name when you set up a network. Shares When settings are set to default, each USB device connected to the XMG is given a folder, called a share. If a USB hard drive connected to the XMG has more than one partition, then each partition will be allocated a share. You can also configure a share to be a sub-folder or file on the USB device. File Systems A file system is a way of storing and organizing files on your hard drive and storage device. Often different operating systems such as Windows or Linux have different file systems. The file sharing feature on your XMG supports File Allocation Table (FAT) and FAT32. Common Internet File System The XMG uses Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol for its file sharing functions. CIFS compatible computers can access the USB file storage devices connected to the XMG. CIFS protocol is supported on Microsoft Windows, Linux Samba and other operating systems (refer to your systems specifications for CIFS compatibility). 15.1.3 Before You Begin Make sure the XMG is connected to your network and turned on. 1 Connect the USB device to one of the XMGs USB port. Make sure the XMG is connected to your network. 2 The XMG detects the USB device and makes its contents available for browsing. If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on. Note: If your USB device cannot be detected by the XMG, see the troubleshooting for suggestions. 15.2 The File Sharing Screen Use this screen to set up file sharing through the XMG. The XMGs LAN users can access the shared folder

(or share) from the USB device inserted in the XMG. To access this screen, click Network Setting > USB Service > File Sharing. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 177 Chapter 15 USB Service Figure 103 Network Setting > USB Service > File Sharing Each field is described in the following table. DESCRIPTION Table 76 Network Setting > USB Service > File Sharing LABEL Information Volume Capacity Used Space Server Configuration File Sharing Services Account Management Add New User Active Status This is the volume name the XMG gives to an inserted USB device. This is the total available memory size (in megabytes) on the USB device. This is the memory size (in megabytes) already used on the USB device. Select Enable to activate file sharing through the XMG. Click this button to create a user account to access the secured shares. Select this to allow the user to access the secured shares. This field shows the status of the user.

: The user account is not activated for the share.

: The user account is activated for the share. User Name Modify Apply Cancel This is the name of a user who is allowed to access the secured shares on the USB device. Click the Edit icon to modify the user account. Click the Delete icon to remove the user account from the XMG. Click this to save your changes to the XMG. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 15.2.1 The Add New User Screen Use this screen to create a user account that can access the secured shares on the USB device. To access this screen, click the Add New User button in the Network Setting > USB Service > File Sharing screen. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 178 Chapter 15 USB Service Figure 104 Network Setting > USB Service > File Sharing > Add new user Each field is described in the following table. Table 77 Network Setting > USB Service > File Sharing > Add new user LABEL User Name New Password DESCRIPTION Enter a user name. You can enter up to 16 characters. Only letters and numbers allowed. Enter the password used to access the secured share. The password must be 5 to 15 characters long. Only letters and numbers are allowed. The password is case sensitive. Retype the password that you entered above. Retype New Password Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes to the XMG. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. 15.3 The Media Server Screen The media server feature lets anyone on your network play video, music, and photos from the USB storage device connected to your XMG (without having to copy them to another computer). The XMG can function as a DLNA-compliant media server. The XMG streams files to DLNA-compliant media clients (like Windows Media Player). The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a group of personal computer and electronics companies that works to make products compatible in a home network. The XMG media server enables you to:

Publish all shares for everyone to play media files in the USB storage device connected to the XMG. Use hardware-based media clients like the DMA-2500 to play the files. Note: Anyone on your network can play the media files in the published shares. No user name and password or other form of security is used. The media server is enabled by default with the video, photo, and music shares published. To change your XMGs media server settings, click Network Setting > USB Service > Media Server. The screen appears as shown. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 179 Chapter 15 USB Service Figure 105 Network Setting > USB Service > Media Server The following table describes the labels in this menu. Table 78 Network Setting > USB Service > Media Server LABEL Media Server DESCRIPTION Select Enable to have the XMG function as a DLNA-compliant media server. Enable the media server to let (DLNA-compliant) media clients on your network play media files located in the shares. Select an interface on which you want to enable the media server function. Enter the path clients use to access the media files on a USB storage device connected to the XMG. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Interface Media Library Path Apply Cancel XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 180 CHAPTER 16 Firewall 16.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the XMGs security settings. Use the firewall to protect your XMG and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to it. By default the firewall:

allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks. blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN. The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM (Instant Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2). However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked (3 and 4). Figure 106 Default Firewall Action LAN WAN A 1 2 3 4 16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General screen to configure the security level of the firewall on the XMG (Section 16.2 on page 182). Use the Protocol screen to add or remove predefined Internet services and configure firewall rules

(Section 16.3 on page 183). Use the Access Control screen to view and configure incoming/outgoing filtering rules (Section 16.4 on page 185). Use the DoS screen to activate protection against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks (.Section 16.5 on page 187). XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 181 Chapter 16 Firewall 16.1.2 What You Need to Know SYN Attack A SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets. Each packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response. While the targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-

ACK, it queues up all outstanding SYN-ACK responses on a backlog queue. SYN-ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer terminates the three-way handshake. Once the queue is full, the system will ignore all incoming SYN requests, making the system unavailable for legitimate users. DoS Denials of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the Internet. Their goal is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources. The XMG is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart all known DoS attacks. DDoS A DDoS attack is one in which multiple compromised systems attack a single target, thereby causing denial of service for users of the targeted system. LAND Attack In a LAND attack, hackers flood SYN packets into the network with a spoofed source IP address of the target system. This makes it appear as if the host computer sent the packets to itself, making the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to itself. Ping of Death Ping of Death uses a "ping" utility to create and send an IP packet that exceeds the maximum 65,536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification. This may cause systems to crash, hang or reboot. SPI Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI) tracks each connection crossing the firewall and makes sure it is valid. Filtering decisions are based not only on rules but also context. For example, traffic from the WAN may only be allowed to cross the firewall in response to a request from the LAN. 16.2 The Firewall Screen Use this screen to set the security level of the firewall on the XMG. Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply. Click Security > Firewall to display the General screen. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 182 Chapter 16 Firewall Figure 107 Security > Firewall > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 79 Security > Firewall > General LABEL Firewall Low Medium High Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate the firewall feature on the XMG. Select Low to allow LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions. Select Medium to allow LAN to WAN but deny WAN to LAN packet directions. Select High to deny LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 16.3 The Protocol Screen You can configure customized services and port numbers in the Protocol screen. For a comprehensive list of port numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority) website. See Appendix C on page 268 for some examples. Click Security > Firewall > Protocol to display the following screen. Figure 108 Security > Firewall > Protocol XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 183 Chapter 16 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new service. Table 80 Security > Firewall > Protocol LABEL Add New Protocol Entry Name Description Ports/Protocol Number Modify This is the name of your customized service. This is the description of your customized service. This shows the IP protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or TCP/UDP) and the port number or range of ports that defines your customized service. Other and the protocol number displays if the service uses another IP protocol. Click the Edit icon to edit the entry. Click the Delete icon to remove this entry. 16.3.1 Add/Edit a Service Use this screen to add a customized service rule that you can use in the firewalls ACL rule configuration. Click Add New Protocol Entry or the edit icon next to an existing service rule in the Protocol screen to display the following screen. Figure 109 Security > Firewall > Protocol: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 81 Security > Firewall > Protocol: Add/Edit LABEL Service Name Description Protocol Source/

Destination Port Protocol Number DESCRIPTION Enter a unique name (up to 32 printable English keyboard characters, including spaces) for your customized port. Enter a description for your customized port. Choose the IP protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP, ICMPv6 or Other) that defines your customized port from the drop-down list box. Select Other to be able to enter a protocol number. These fields are displayed if you select TCP or UDP as the IP port. Select Single to specify one port only or Range to specify a span of ports that define your customized service. If you select Any, the service is applied to all ports. Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized service. This field is displayed if you select Other as the protocol. Enter the protocol number of your customized port. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 184 Chapter 16 Firewall Table 81 Security > Firewall > Protocol: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL ICMPv6 Type DESCRIPTION This field is displayed if you select ICMPv6 as the protocol. OK Cancel Enter the type value for the ICMPv6 messages. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 16.4 The Access Control Screen Click Security > Firewall > Access Control to display the following screen. This screen displays a list of the configured incoming or outgoing filtering rules. Figure 110 Security > Firewall > Access Control The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this to go to add a filter rule for incoming or outgoing IP traffic. Table 82 Security > Firewall > Access Control LABEL Add New ACL Rule

#

Name Src IP This is the index number of the entry. This displays the name of the rule. This displays the source IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that a blank source address is equivalent to Any. This displays the destination IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that a blank destination address is equivalent to Any. This displays the transport layer protocol that defines the service and the direction of traffic to which this rule applies. This field displays whether the rule silently discards packets (DROP), discards packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender (REJECT) or allows the passage of packets (ACCEPT). Click the Edit icon to edit the rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. Click the Move To icon to change the order of the rule. Enter the number in the # field. Dst IP Service Action Modify 16.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule Click Add new ACL rule or the Edit icon next to an existing ACL rule in the Access Control screen. The following screen displays. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 185 Chapter 16 Firewall Figure 111 Access Control: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 83 Access Control: Add/Edit LABEL Filter Name DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters, not including spaces, underscores, and dashes. Order Select Source Device Source IP Address Select Destination Device Destination IP Address IP Type Select Service Protocol You must enter the filter name to add an ACL rule. This field is read-only if you are editing the ACL rule. Select the order of the ACL rule. Select the source device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Specific IP Address, enter the source IP address in the field below. Enter the source IP address. Select the destination device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Specific IP Address, enter the destiniation IP address in the field below. Enter the destination IP address. Select whether your IP type is IPv4 or IPv6. Select the transport layer protocol that defines your customized port from the drop-down list box. The specific protocol rule sets you add in the Security > Firewall > Service > Add screen display in this list. If you want to configure a customized protocol, select Specific Service. This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol. Choose the IP port (TCP/UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, or ICMPv6) that defines your customized port from the drop-down list box. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 186 Chapter 16 Firewall Table 83 Access Control: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL Custom Source Port DESCRIPTION This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol. Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the source. This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol. Custom Destination Port Policy Direction Enable Rate Limit Scheduler Rules Apply Cancel Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the destination. Use the drop-down list box to select whether to discard (DROP), deny and send an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender of (REJECT) or allow the passage of (ACCEPT) packets that match this rule. Use the drop-down list box to select the direction of traffic to which this rule applies. Select Enable to set a limit on the upstream/downstream transmission rate for the specified protocol. Specify how many packets per minute or second the transmission rate is. Select a schedule rule for this ACL rule form the drop-down list box. You can configure a new schedule rule by click Add New Rule. This will bring you to the Security > Scheduler Rules screen. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 16.5 The DoS Screen DoS (Denial of Service) attacks can flood your Internet connection with invalid packets and connection requests, using so much bandwidth and so many resources that Internet access becomes unavailable. Use the DoS screen to activate protection against DoS attacks. Click Security > Firewall > DoS to display the following screen. Figure 112 Security > Firewall > DoS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 84 Security > Firewall > DoS LABEL DoS Protection Blocking Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Select Enable to enable protection against DoS attacks. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 187 CHAPTER 17 MAC Filter 17.1 Overview You can configure the XMG to permit access to clients based on their MAC addresses in the MAC Filter screen. This applies to wired and wireless connections. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen. 17.2 The MAC Filter Screen Use this screen to allow wireless and LAN clients access to the XMG. Click Security > MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown. Figure 113 Security > MAC Filter XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 188 Chapter 17 MAC Filter The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 85 Security > MAC Filter LABEL MAC Address Filter MAC Restrict Mode DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate the MAC filter function. Select Allow to only permit the listed MAC addresses access to the XMG. Select Deny to permit anyone access to the XMG except the listed MAC addresses. This is the index number of the MAC address. Select Active to enable the MAC filter rule. The rule will not be applied if Active is not selected. Enter the host name of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the XMG. Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the XMG in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Set Active Host Name MAC Address Apply Cancel XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 189 CHAPTER 18 Parental Control 18.1 Overview Parental control allows you to block web sites with the specific URL. You can also define time periods and days during which the XMG performs parental control on a specific user. 18.2 The Parental Control Screen Use this screen to enable parental control, view the parental control rules and schedules. Click Security > Parental Control to open the following screen. Figure 114 Security > Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 86 Security > Parental Control LABEL General Parental Control Parental Control Profile (PCP) Add New PCP

#

Status Select Enable to activate parental control. Click this if you want to configure a new Parental Control Profile. This shows the index number of the rule. This indicates whether the rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active. This shows the name of the rule. This shows the MAC address of the LAN users computer to which this rule applies. PCP Name Home Network User MAC Internet Access Schedule Network Service This shows whether the network service is configured. If not, None will be shown. Website Blocked This shows whether the website block is configured. If not, None will be shown. This shows the day(s) and time on which parental control is enabled. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 190 Chapter 18 Parental Control Table 86 Security > Parental Control (continued) LABEL Modify DESCRIPTION Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Cancel 18.2.1 Add/Edit a Parental Control Profile Click Add New PCP in the Parental Control screen to add a new rule or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to edit it. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule and/or URL filtering settings to block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites. Figure 115 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit Rule XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 191 Chapter 18 Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 87 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit LABEL General Active Parental Control Profile Name Home Network User Rule List Select to enable or disable this parental control rule. Enter a descriptive name for the rule. Select the LAN user that you want to apply this rule to from the drop-down list box. If you select Custom, enter the LAN users MAC address. If you select All, the rule applies to all LAN users. In Home Network User, select Custom, enter the LAN users MAC address, then click the Add icon to enter a computer MAC address for this PCP. Up to five are allowed. Click the Delete icon to remove one. Internet Access Schedule Day Time Select check boxes for the days that you want the XMG to perform parental control. Drag the time bar to define the time that the LAN user is allowed access (Authorized access) or denied access (No access). Click the Add icon above the time bar to add a new time bar. Up to three are allowed. Network Service Network Service Setting Add New Service

#

Service Name Protocol:Port Modify Site/URL Keyword Block or Allow the Web Site Add

#

WebSite Modify If you select Block, the XMG prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with the URLs listed below. If you select Allow, the XMG blocks access to all URLs except ones listed below. Click this to show a screen in which you can add a new service rule. You can configure the Service Name, Protocol, and Name of the new rule. This shows the index number of the rule. This shows the name of the rule. This shows the protocol and the port of the rule. Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. If you select Block the Web URLs, the XMG prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with the URLs listed below. If you select Allow the Web URLs, the XMG blocks access to all URLs except ones listed below. Click Add to show a screen to enter the URL of web site or URL keyword to which the XMG blocks or allows access. This shows the index number of the rule. This shows the URL of web site or URL keyword to which the XMG blocks or allows access. Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 192 Chapter 18 Parental Control Table 87 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL Redirect blocked site to Zyxel Family Safety page DESCRIPTION Select this to redirect users who access any blocked websites listed above to the Zyxel Family Safety page as shown next. Figure 116 Zyxel Family Safety Page Example OK Cancel Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to to exit this screen without saving. Click Security > Parental Control > Add/Edit Rule > Add New Service to open the following screen. Figure 117 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit Rule > Add New Service The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 88 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit Rule > Add New Service LABEL Service Name DESCRIPTION Select the name of the service. Otherwise, select User Define and manualy specify the protocol and the port of the service. If you have chosen a pre-defined service in the Service Name field, this field will not be configurable. Select the transport layer protocol used for the service. Choices are TCP, UDP, or TCP

& UDP. Enter the port of the service. If you have chosen a pre-defined service in the Service Name field, this field will not be configurable. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 193 Protocol Port Chapter 18 Parental Control Table 88 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit Rule > Add New Service LABEL OK Cancel DESCRIPTION Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Click Security > Parental Control > Add/Edit Rule > Add Keyword to open the following screen. Figure 118 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit Rule > Add Keyword The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 89 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit Rule > Add Keyword LABEL Site/URL Keyword DESCRIPTION Enter a keyword and click OK to have the XMG to block access to the website URLs that contain the keyword Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. OK Cancel XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 194 CHAPTER 19 Scheduler Rule 19.1 Overview You can define time periods and days during which the XMG performs scheduled rules of certain features (such as Firewall Access Control) in the Scheduler Rule screen. 19.2 The Scheduler Rule Screen Use this screen to view, add, or edit time schedule rules. Click Security > Scheduler Rule to open the following screen. Figure 119 Security > Scheduler Rule The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 90 Security > Scheduler Rule LABEL Add New Rule

#

Rule Name Day Time Description Modify DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new rule. This is the index number of the entry. This shows the name of the rule. This shows the day(s) on which this rule is enabled. This shows the period of time on which this rule is enabled. This shows the description of this rule. Click the Edit icon to edit the schedule. Click the Delete icon to delete a scheduler rule. Note: You cannot delete a scheduler rule once it is applied to a certain feature. 19.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule Click the Add New Rule button in the Scheduler Rule screen or click the Edit icon next to a schedule rule to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 195 Chapter 19 Scheduler Rule Figure 120 Scheduler Rule: Add/Edit The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 91 Scheduler Rule: Add/Edit LABEL Rule Name DESCRIPTION Enter a name (up to 31 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces) for this schedule. Select check boxes for the days that you want the XMG to perform this scheduler rule. Enter the time period of each day, in 24-hour format, during which the rule will be enforced. Day Time of Day Range Description OK Cancel Enter a description for this scheduler rule. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 196 CHAPTER 20 Certificates 20.1 Overview The XMG can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owners identity and public key. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication. 20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Local Certificates screen to generate certification requests and import the XMG's CA-signed certificates (Section 20.4 on page 200). Use the Trusted CA screen to save the certificates of trusted CAs to the XMG (Section 20.4 on page 200). 20.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. Certification Authority A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities. The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can then use the certification authority's public key to verify the certificates. You can use the XMG to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send the certification requests to a certification authority. 20.3 The Local Certificates Screen Click Security > Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen. This is the XMGs summary list of certificates and certification requests. Figure 121 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 197 Chapter 20 Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 92 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates LABEL Private Key is protected by a password Choose File Import Certificate Click this button to save the certificate that you have enrolled from a certification authority DESCRIPTION Select the checkbox and enter the private key into the text box to store it on the XMG. The private key should not exceed 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces). Click this to find the certificate file you want to upload. Create Certificate Request Current File Subject Issuer Valid From Valid To Modify from your computer to the XMG. Click this button to go to the screen where you can have the XMG generate a certification request. This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name. This field displays identifying information about the certificates owner, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C

(Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. This field displays identifying information about the certificates issuing certification authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and country. This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable. This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired. Click the View icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate

(or certification request). For a certification request, click Load Signed to import the signed certificate. Click the Remove icon to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use. 20.3.1 Create Certificate Request Click Security > Certificates > Local Certificates and then Create Certificate Request to open the following screen. Use this screen to have the XMG generate a certification request. Figure 122 Create Certificate Request XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 198 Chapter 20 Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 93 Create Certificate Request LABEL Certificate Name Common Name Select Auto to have the XMG configure this field automatically. Or select Customize to enter it DESCRIPTION Type up to 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this certificate. manually. Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name or e-mail address in the field provided. The domain name or e-mail address can be up to 63 ASCII characters. The domain name or e-mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string. Type up to 63 characters to identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs. You may use any character, including spaces, but the XMG drops trailing spaces. Type up to 32 characters to identify the state or province where the certificate owner is located. You may use any character, including spaces, but the XMG drops trailing spaces. Select a country to identify the nation where the certificate owner is located. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Organization Name State/Province Name Country/Region Name Apply Cancel After you click Apply, the following screen displays to notify you that you need to get the certificate request signed by a Certificate Authority. If you already have, click Load_Signed to import the signed certificate into the XMG. Otherwise click Back to return to the Local Certificates screen. Figure 123 Certificate Request Created 20.3.2 Load Signed Certificate After you create a certificate request and have it signed by a Certificate Authority, in the Local Certificates screen click the certificate requests Load Signed icon to import the signed certificate into the XMG. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 199 Chapter 20 Certificates Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificates filename before you can import it. Figure 124 Load Signed Certificate The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION This is the name of the signed certificate. Table 94 Load Signed Certificate LABEL Certificate Name Certificate Apply Cancel Copy and paste the signed certificate into the text box to store it on the XMG. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 20.4 The Trusted CA Screen Click Security > Certificates > Trusted CA to open the following screen. This screen displays a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the XMG to accept as trusted. The XMG accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities. Figure 125 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 200

Chapter 20 Certificates The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 95 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA LABEL Import Certificate

#

Name Subject DESCRIPTION Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust to the XMG. This is the index number of the entry. This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name

(CN), OU (Organizational Unit or department), Organization (O), State (ST) and Country (C). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Click the View icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate (or certification request). Click the Remove button to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use. Type Modify 20.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate Click the View icon in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to view in-

depth information about the certification authoritys certificate. Figure 126 Trusted CA: View The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 96 Trusted CA: View LABEL Name Type Subject DESCRIPTION This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name

(CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O) and Country (C). XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 201 Chapter 20 Certificates Table 96 Trusted CA: View (continued) LABEL Certificate DESCRIPTION This read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable form. You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example). Click Back to return to the previous screen. Back 20.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate Click the Import Certificate button in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. The XMG trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates. Figure 127 Trusted CA: Import Certificate The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 97 Trusted CA: Import Certificate LABEL Certificate File Path Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the certificate you want to upload in this field or click Choose File to find it. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 202 CHAPTER 21 Log 21.1 Overview The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and/or alerts to have the XMG log and then display the logs or have the XMG send them to an administrator (as e-mail) or to a syslog server. 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the System Log screen to see the system logs (Section 21.2 on page 204). Use the Security Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select (Section 21.3 on page 204). 21.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. Alerts and Logs An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors, attacks (access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites. Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black. Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server. Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet format, content and system log related information of syslog messages. Each syslog message has a facility and severity level. The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details. The following table describes the syslog severity levels. Table 98 Syslog Severity Levels CODE 0 1 2 3 4 SEVERITY Emergency: The system is unusable. Alert: Action must be taken immediately. Critical: The system condition is critical. Error: There is an error condition on the system. Warning: There is a warning condition on the system. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 203 Chapter 21 Log Table 98 Syslog Severity Levels CODE 5 6 7 SEVERITY Notice: There is a normal but significant condition on the system. Informational: The syslog contains an informational message. Debug: The message is intended for debug-level purposes. 21.2 The System Log Screen Use the System Log screen to see the system logs. Click System Monitor > Log to open the System Log screen. Figure 128 System Monitor > Log > System Log The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 99 System Monitor > Log > System Log LABEL Level DESCRIPTION Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the XMG searches through all logs of that severity or higher. Select the type of logs to display. Click this to delete all the logs. Click this to renew the log screen. Click this to export the selected log(s). Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the Maintenance > Logs Setting screen. This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry. This field displays the time the log was recorded. The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details. This field displays the severity level of the log that the device is to send to this syslog server. This field displays the type of the log. This field states the reason for the log. Category Clear Log Refresh Export Log Email Log Now

#

Time Facility Level Category Messages 21.3 The Security Log Screen Use the Security Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select. Click System Monitor > Log > Security Log to open the following screen. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 204 Chapter 21 Log Figure 129 System Monitor > Log > Security Log The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 100 System Monitor > Log > Security Log LABEL Level DESCRIPTION Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the XMG searches through all logs of that severity or higher. Select the type of logs to display. Click this to delete all the logs. Click this to renew the log screen. Click this to export the selected log(s). Category Clear Log Refresh Export Log E-mail Log Now Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the Maintenance > Logs

#

Time Facility Level Category Messages Setting screen. This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry. This field displays the time the log was recorded. The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details. This field displays the severity level of the log that the device is to send to this syslog server. This field displays the type of the log. This field states the reason for the log. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 205 CHAPTER 22 Traffic Status 22.1 Overview Use the Traffic Status screens to look at network traffic status and statistics of the WAN, LAN interfaces and NAT. 22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the WAN screen to view the WAN traffic statistics (Section 22.2 on page 206). Use the LAN screen to view the LAN traffic statistics (Section 22.3 on page 207). Use the NAT screen to view the NAT status of the XMGs client(s) (Section 22.4 on page 208) 22.2 The WAN Status Screen Click System Monitor > Traffic Status to open the WAN screen. The figure in this screen shows the number of bytes received and sent on the XMG. Figure 130 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 101 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN LABEL Refresh Interval Connected Interface Packets Sent DESCRIPTION Select how often you want the XMG to update this screen. This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently connected. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 206 Chapter 22 Traffic Status Table 101 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. Click more... to show more information. Click hide more to hide them. This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently disconnected. This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. Data Error Drop Packets Received Data Error Drop Disabled Interface Packets Sent Data Error Drop Packets Received Data Error Drop This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. 22.3 The LAN Status Screen Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN to open the following screen. The figure in this screen shows the interface that is currently connected on the XMG. Figure 131 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 102 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN LABEL Refresh Interval Interface Bytes Sent DESCRIPTION Select how often you want the XMG to update this screen. This shows the LAN or WLAN interface. This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 207 Chapter 22 Traffic Status Table 102 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN (continued) LABEL Bytes Received Interface Sent (Packets) DESCRIPTION This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface. This shows the LAN or WLAN interfaces. Data Error Drop This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. Received (Packets) Data Error Drop This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. 22.4 The NAT Status Screen Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT to open the following screen. The figure in this screen shows the NAT session statistics for hosts currently connected on the XMG. Figure 132 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 103 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT LABEL Refresh Interval Device Name IPv4 Address MAC Address No. of Open Session Total DESCRIPTION Select how often you want the XMG to update this screen. This displays the name of the connected host. This displays the IPv4 address of the connected host. This displays the MAC address of the connected host. This displays the number of NAT sessions currently opened for the connected host. This displays what percentage of NAT sessions the XMG can support is currently being used by all connected hosts. You can also see the number of active NAT sessions and the maximum number of NAT sessions the XMG can support. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 208 CHAPTER 23 ARP Table 23.1 Overview Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on the local area network. An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address. 23.1.1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the device, the device's ARP program looks in the ARP Table and, if it finds the address, sends it to the device. If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN. The device fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the device puts all ones in the target MAC field

(FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The replying device (which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the broadcast address with the target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied. 23.2 ARP Table Screen Use the ARP table to view IP-to-MAC address mapping(s). To open this screen, click System Monitor >

ARP Table. Figure 133 System Monitor > ARP Table XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 209 Chapter 23 ARP Table The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 104 System Monitor > ARP Table LABEL

#

IPv4/IPv6 Address MAC Address Device DESCRIPTION This is the ARP table entry number. This is the learned IPv4 or IPv6 address of a device connected to a port. This is the MAC address of the device with the listed IP address. This is the type of interface used by the device. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 210 CHAPTER 24 Routing Table 24.1 Overview Routing is based on the destination address only and the XMG takes the shortest path to forward a packet. 24.2 The Routing Table Screen Click System Monitor > Routing Table to open the following screen. Figure 134 System Monitor > Routing Table The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 105 System Monitor > Routing Table LABEL IPv4/IPv6 Routing Table Destination Gateway This indicates the destination IPv4 address or IPv6 address and prefix of this route. This indicates the IPv4 address or IPv6 address of the gateway that helps forward this routes traffic. This indicates the destination subnet mask of the IPv4 route. Subnet Mask XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 211 Chapter 24 Routing Table Table 105 System Monitor > Routing Table (continued) LABEL Flag DESCRIPTION This indicates the route status. U-Up: The route is up.

!-Reject: The route is blocked and will force a route lookup to fail. G-Gateway: The route uses a gateway to forward traffic. H-Host: The target of the route is a host. R-Reinstate: The route is reinstated for dynamic routing. D-Dynamic (redirect): The route is dynamically installed by a routing daemon or redirect. M-Modified (redirect): The route is modified from a routing daemon or redirect. The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". The smaller the number, the lower the

"cost". This indicates the name of the interface through which the route is forwarded. brx indicates a LAN interface where x can be 0~3 to represent LAN1 to LAN4 respectively. ptm0 indicates a DSL WAN interface using IPoE, IPoA or in bridge mode. ethx indicates an Ethernet WAN interface using IPoE or in bridge mode. ppp0 indicates a WAN interface using PPPoE or PPPoA. Metric Interface XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 212 CHAPTER 25 Multicast Status 25.1 Overview Use the Multicast Status screens to look at IGMP/MLD group status and traffic statistics. 25.2 The IGMP Status Screen Use this screen to look at the current list of multicast groups the XMG has joined and which ports have joined it. To open this screen, click System Monitor > Multicast Status > IGMP Status. Figure 135 System Monitor > Multicast Status > IGMP Status The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 106 System Monitor > Multicast Status > IGMP Status LABEL Refresh Interface Multicast Group This field displays the name of the IGMP multicast group to which the interface belongs. Filter Mode DESCRIPTION Click this button to update the information on this screen. This field displays the name of an interface on the XMG that belongs to an IGMP multicast group. INCLUDE means that only the IP addresses in the Source List get to receive the multicast groups traffic. EXCLUDE means that the IP addresses in the Source List are not allowed to receive the multicast groups traffic but other IP addresses can. This is the list of IP addresses that are allowed or not allowed to receive the multicast groups traffic depending on the filter mode. This is the list of the members of the multicast group. Source List Member 25.3 The MLD Status Screen Use this screen to look at the current list of multicast groups the XMG has joined and which ports have joined it. To open this screen, click System Monitor > Multicast Status > MLD Status. Figure 136 System Monitor > Multicast Status > MLD Status XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 213 Chapter 25 Multicast Status The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 107 System Monitor > Multicast Status > MLD Status LABEL Refresh Interface Multicast Group This field displays the name of the MLD multicast group to which the interface belongs. Filter Mode DESCRIPTION Click this button to update the status on this screen. This field displays the name of an interface on the XMG that belongs to an MLD multicast group. INCLUDE means that only the IP addresses in the Source List get to receive the multicast groups traffic. EXCLUDE means that the IP addresses in the Source List are not allowed to receive the multicast groups traffic but other IP addresses can. This is the list of IP addresses that are allowed or not allowed to receive the multicast groups traffic depending on the filter mode. This is the list of members in the multicast group. Source List Member XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 214 CHAPTER 26 xDSL Statistics 26.1 The xDSL Statistics Screen Use this screen to view detailed DSL statistics. Click System Monitor > xDSL Statistics to open the following screen. Figure 137 System Monitor > xDSL Statistics The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 108 Status > xDSL Statistics DESCRIPTION LABEL Select the time interval for refreshing statistics. Refresh Interval Select which DSL lines statistics you want to display. Line xDSL Training This displays the current state of setting up the DSL connection. Status Mode Traffic Type This displays the ITU standard used for this connection. This displays the type of traffic the DSL port is sending and receiving. Inactive displays if the DSL port is not currently sending or receiving traffic. This displays how long the port has been running (or connected) since the last time it was started. Link Uptime XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 215 Chapter 26 xDSL Statistics DESCRIPTION Table 108 Status > xDSL Statistics (continued) LABEL xDSL Port Details Upstream Downstream Line Rate Actual Net Data Rate Trellis Coding These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service provider. These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service provider. These are the data transfer rates at which the port is sending and receiving data. These are the rates at which the port is sending and receiving the payload data without transport layer protocol headers and traffic. This displays whether or not the port is using Trellis coding for traffic it is sending and receiving. Trellis coding helps to reduce the noise in ADSL transmissions. Trellis may reduce throughput but it makes the connection more stable. This is the upstream and downstream Signal-to-Noise Ratio margin (in dB). A DMT sub-carriers SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power. The signal-

to-noise ratio margin is the maximum that the received noise power could increase with the system still being able to meet its transmission targets. This is the upstream and downstream interleave delay. It is the wait (in milliseconds) that determines the size of a single block of data to be interleaved (assembled) and then transmitted. Interleave delay is used when transmission error correction (Reed- Solomon) is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line. The bigger the delay, the bigger the data block size, allowing better error correction to be performed. This is the upstream and downstream far end actual aggregate transmit power (in dBm). Upstream is how much power the port is using to transmit to the service provider. Downstream is how much port the service provider is using to transmit to the port. Upstream is how much power the service provider is receiving from the port. Downstream is how much power the port is receiving from the service provider. Sudden spikes in the lines level of external noise (impulse noise) can cause errors and result in lost packets. This could especially impact the quality of multimedia traffic such as voice or video. Impulse noise protection (INP) provides a buffer to allow for correction of errors caused by error correction to deal with this. The number of DMT (Discrete Multi-Tone) symbols shows the level of impulse noise protection for the upstream and downstream traffic. A higher symbol value provides higher error correction capability, but it causes overhead and higher delay which may increase error rates in received multimedia data. This is the upstream and downstream line attenuation, measured in decibels (dB). This attenuation is the difference between the power transmitted at the near-end and the power received at the far-end. Attenuation is affected by the channel characteristics (wire gauge, quality, condition and length of the physical line). These are the highest theoretically possible transfer rates at which the port could send and receive payload data without transport layer protocol headers and traffic. These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service provider. These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service provider. This is the number of Far End Corrected blocks. This is the number of Cyclic Redundancy Checks. This is the number of Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing at least one errored block or at least one defect. This is the number of Severely Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing 30%

or more errored blocks or at least one defect. This is a subset of ES. This is the number of UnAvailable Seconds. This is the number of Loss Of Signal seconds. This is the number of Loss Of Frame seconds. This is the number of Loss of Margin seconds. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 216 SNR Margin Actual Delay Transmit Power Receive Power Actual INP Total Attenuation Attainable Net Data Rate xDSL Counters Downstream Upstream FEC CRC ES SES UAS LOS LOF LOM CHAPTER 27 System 27.1 Overview In the System screen, you can name your XMG (Host) and give it an associated domain name for identification purposes. 27.2 The System Screen Click Maintenance > System to open the following screen. Figure 138 Maintenance > System The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 109 Maintenance > System LABEL Host Name DESCRIPTION Type a hostname for your XMG. Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters, not including spaces, underscores, and dashes. Type a Domain name for your host XMG. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to abandon this screen without saving. Domain Name Apply Cancel XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 217 CHAPTER 28 User Account 28.1 Overview In the User Account screen, you can view the settings of the admin and other user accounts that you used to log in the XMG. 28.2 The User Account Screen Click Maintenance > User Account to open the following screen. Figure 139 Maintenance > User Account The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this button to add a new user account. Table 110 Maintenance > User Account LABEL Add New Account

#

User Name Retry Times This is the index number This field displays the name of the account used to log into the XMG web configurator. This field displays the number of times consecutive wrong passwords can be entered for this account. 0 means there is no limit. This field displays the the length of inactive time before the XMG will automatically log the user out of the web configurator. This field displays the length of time a user must wait before attempting to log in again after a number of consecutive wrong passwords have been entered as defined in Retry Times. This field displays whether this user has Administrator or User privleges. Click the Edit icon to configure the entry. Click the Delete icon to remove the entry. Idle Timeout Lock Period Group Modify 28.2.1 The User Account Add/Edit Screen Click Add New Account or the Edit icon of an existing account in the Maintenance > User Account to open the following screen. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 218 Chapter 28 User Account Figure 140 Maintenance > User Account > Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 111 Maintenance > User Account > Add/Edit LABEL User Name Old Password Password/New Password DESCRIPTION Enter a new name for the account. This field displays the name of an existing account. Type the default password or the existing password used to access the XMG web configurator. Type your new system password (up to 256 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays a (*) for each character you type. After you change the password, use the new password to access the XMG. Type the new password again for confirmation. Verify Password/

Verify New Password Retry Times Idle Timeout Lock Period Group OK Cancel Enter the number of times consecutive wrong passwords can be entered for this account. 0 means there is no limit. Enter the length of inactive time before the XMG will automatically log the user out of the web configurator. Enter the length of time a user must wait before attempting to log in again after a number if consecutive wrong passwords have been entered as defined in Retry Times. Specify whether this user will have Administrator or User privleges. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 219 CHAPTER 29 Remote Management 29.1 Overview Remote management controls through which interface(s), which services can access the XMG. Note: The XMG is managed using the Web Configurator. 29.2 The MGMT Services Screen Use this screen to configure through which interface(s), which services can access the XMG. You can also specify the port numbers the services must use to connect to the XMG. Click Maintenance >

Remote Management > MGMT Services to open the following screen. Figure 141 Maintenance > Remote Management > MGMT Services The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 112 Maintenance > Remote Management > MGMT Services LABEL WAN Interface used for services DESCRIPTION Select Any_WAN to have the XMG automatically activate the remote management service when any WAN connection is up. Select Multi_WAN and then select one or more WAN connections to have the XMG activate the remote management service when the selected WAN connections are up. This is the service you may use to access the XMG. Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the XMG from the LAN/WLAN. Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the XMG from all WAN connections. service LAN/WLAN WAN XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 220 Chapter 29 Remote Management Table 112 Maintenance > Remote Management > MGMT Services (continued) LABEL Trust Domain DESCRIPTION Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the XMG from the trusted hosts configured in the Maintenance > Remote MGMT > Trust Domain screen. If you only want certain WAN connections to have access to the XMG using the corresponding services, then clear WAN, select Trust Domain and configure the allowed IP address(es) in the Trust Domain screen. You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Click Apply to save your changes back to the XMG. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Port Apply Cancel 29.3 The Trust Domain Screen Use this screen to view a list of public IP addresses which are allowed to access the XMG through the services configured in the Maintenance > Remote Management screen. Click Maintenance > Remote Management > Trust Domain to open the following screen. Note: If this list is empty, all public IP addresses can access the XMG from the WAN through the specified services. Figure 142 Maintenance > Remote Management > Trust Domain The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this to add a trusted host IP address. Table 113 Maintenance > Remote Management > Trust Domain LABEL Add Trust Domain IP Address Delete This field shows a trusted host IP address. Click the Delete icon to remove the trust IP address. 29.3.1 The Add Trust Domain Screen Use this screen to configure a public IP address which is allowed to access the XMG. Click the Add Trust Domain button in the Maintenance > Remote Management > Turst Domain screen to open the following screen. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 221 Chapter 29 Remote Management Figure 143 Maintenance > Remote Management > Trust Domain > Add Trust Domain The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 114 Maintenance > Remote Management > Trust Domain > Add Trust Domain LABEL IP Address DESCRIPTION Apply Cancel Enter a public IPv4 IP address which is allowed to access the service on the XMG from the WAN. Click Apply to save your changes back to the XMG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 222 CHAPTER 30 SNMP 30.1 Overview This chapter explains how to configure the SNMP settings on the XMG. 30.2 The SNMP Screen Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices. Your XMG supports SNMP agent functionality, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the XMG through the network. The XMG supports SNMP version one

(SNMPv1) and version two (SNMPv2c). The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation. Figure 144 SNMP Management Model An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component: agents and a manager. An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the XMG). An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices. The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include such as number of packets received, node port status etc. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 223 Chapter 30 SNMP SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:

Get - Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent. GetNext - Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent. In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it initiates a Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations. Set - Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent. Trap - Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events. Click Maintenance > SNMP to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure the XMG SNMP settings. Figure 145 Maintenance > SNMP The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 115 Maintenance > SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION Select Enable to let the XMG act as an SNMP agent, which allows a manager station to SNMP Agent manage and monitor the XMG through the network. Select Disable to turn this feature off. Enter the Get Community, which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station. Enter the Set community, which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station. Get Community Set Community Trap Community System Name System Location System Contact Trap Destination Apply Cancel Enter the Trap Community, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager. The default is public and allows all requests. Enter the SNMP system name. Enter the SNMP system location. Enter the SNMP system contact. Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to. Click this to save your changes back to the XMG. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 224 CHAPTER 31 Time Settings 31.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings, such as system time, password, name, the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval. 31.2 The Time Screen To change your XMGs time and date, click Maintenance > Time. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure the XMGs time based on your local time zone. Figure 146 Maintenance > Time The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 116 Maintenance > Time LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Date/Time Current Time This field displays the time of your XMG. Each time you reload this page, the XMG synchronizes the time with the time server. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 225 Chapter 31 Time Settings Table 116 Maintenance > Time (continued) LABEL Current Date DESCRIPTION This field displays the date of your XMG. Time and Date Setup First ~ Fifth Time Server Address Time Zone Time zone Daylight Savings Active Start Rule End Rule Apply Cancel Each time you reload this page, the XMG synchronizes the date with the time server. Select an NTP time server from the drop-down list box. Otherwise, select Other and enter the IP address or URL (up to 29 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Select None if you dont want to configure the time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information. Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Daylight Saving Time is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening. Select Enable if you use Daylight Saving Time. Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you enabled Daylight Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific week in a particular month. The Hour field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States, set the day to Second, Sunday, the month to March and the time to 2 in the Hour field. Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to Last, Sunday and the month to March. The time you select depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the Hour field because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you enabled Daylight Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific week in a particular month. The Time field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would set the day to First, Sunday, the month to November and the time to 2 in the Time field. Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to Last, Sunday, and the month to October. The time you select depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the Time field because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 226 CHAPTER 32 E-mail Notification 32.1 Overview A mail server is an application or a computer that runs such an application to receive, forward and deliver e-mail messages. To have the XMG send reports, logs or notifications via e-mail, you must specify an e-mail server and the e-mail addresses of the sender and receiver. 32.2 The E-mail Notification Screen Click Maintenance > E-mail Notification to open the E-mail Notification screen. Use this screen to view, remove and add mail server information on the XMG. Figure 147 Maintenance > E-mail Notification The following table describes the labels in this screen. This field displays the server name or the IP address of the mail server. DESCRIPTION Table 117 Maintenance > E-mail Notification LABEL Add New E-mail Click this button to create a new entry. Mail Server Address Username Port Security E-mail Address Remove This field displays the user name of the senders mail account. This field displays the port number of the mail server. This field displays the protocol used for encryption. This field displays the e-mail address that you want to be in the from/sender line of the e-mail that the XMG sends. Click this button to delete the selected entry(ies). 32.2.1 E-mail Notification Edit Click the Add button in the E-mail Notification screen. Use this screen to configure the required information for sending e-mail via a mail server. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 227 Chapter 32 E-mail Notification Figure 148 Email Notification > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 118 Email Notification > Add LABEL Mail Server Address DESCRIPTION Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail address specified in the Account Email Address field. Port Authentication Username Authentication Password Account E-mail Address Connection Security OK Cancel If this field is left blank, reports, logs or notifications will not be sent via e-mail. Enter the same port number here as is on the mail server for mail traffic. Enter the user name (up to 32 characters). This is usually the user name of a mail account you specified in the Account Email Address field. Enter the password associated with the user name above. Enter the e-mail address that you want to be in the from/sender line of the e-mail notification that the XMG sends. If you activate SSL/TLS authentication, the e-mail address must be able to be authenticated by the mail server as well. Select SSL to use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) if you want encrypted communications between the mail server and the XMG. Select STARTTLS to upgrade a plain text connection to a secure connection using SSL/TLS. Click this button to save your changes and return to the previous screen. Click this button to exit this screen without saving. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 228 CHAPTER 33 Log Setting 33.1 Overview You can configure where the XMG sends logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the XMG records in the Logs Setting screen. 33.2 The Log Settings Screen To change your XMGs log settings, click Maintenance > Logs Setting. The screen appears as shown. Figure 149 Maintenance > Logs Setting XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 229 Chapter 33 Log Setting The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 119 Maintenance > Logs Setting LABEL Syslog Setting Syslog Logging Mode The XMG sends a log to an external syslog server. Select Enable to enable syslog logging. Select the syslog destination from the drop-down list box. If you select Remote, the log(s) will be sent to a remote syslog server. If you select Local File, the log(s) will be saved in a local file. If you want to send the log(s) to a remote syslog server and save it in a local file, select Local File and Remote. Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories of logs. Enter the port number used by the syslog server. Select Enable to have the XMG send logs and alarm messages to the configured e-mail addresses. This section is available only when you select Enable in the E-mail Log Settings field. Select a mail account from which you want to send logs. You can configure mail accounts in the Maintenance > E-mail Notification screen. Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the system log e-mail message that the XMG sends. Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the security log e-mail message that the XMG sends. The XMG sends logs to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank, the XMG does not send logs via E-mail. Alerts are real-time notifications that are sent as soon as an event, such as a DoS attack, system error, or forbidden web access attempt occurs. Enter the E-mail address where the alert messages will be sent. Alerts include system errors, attacks and attempted access to blocked web sites. If this field is left blank, alert messages will not be sent via E-mail. Specify how often the alarm should be updated. Select the categories of system logs that you want to record. Select the categories of security logs that you want to record. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Syslog Server UDP Port E-mail Log Settings E-mail Log Settings Mail Account System Log Mail Subject Security Log Mail Subject Send Log to Send Alarm to Alarm Interval Active Log System Log Security Log Apply Cancel 33.2.1 Example E-mail Log An "End of Log" message displays for each mail in which a complete log has been sent. The following is an example of a log sent by e-mail. You may edit the subject title. The date format here is Day-Month-Year. The date format here is Month-Day-Year. The time format is Hour-Minute-Second.

"End of Log" message shows that a complete log has been sent. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 230 Chapter 33 Log Setting Figure 150 E-mail Log Example Subject:

Firewall Alert From Date:

Fri, 07 Apr 2000 10:05:42 From:

user@zyxel.com To:

user@zyxel.com 1|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward

| 09:54:03 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |

2|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward

| 09:54:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |

3|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.6 To:10.10.10.10 |match |forward

| 09:54:19 |UDP src port:03516 dest port:00053 |<1,01> |

..{snip}.. .{snip}.. 126|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:00 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

127|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

128|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:30 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

End of Firewall Log XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 231 CHAPTER 34 Firmware Upgrade 34.1 Overview This chapter explains how to upload new firmware to your XMG. You can download new firmware releases from your nearest Zyxel FTP site (or www.zyxel.com) to use to upgrade your devices performance. Only use firmware for your devices specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your XMG. 34.2 The Firmware Screen Click Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade to open the following screen. The upload process uses HTTP

(Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot. Do NOT turn off the XMG while firmware upload is in progress!

Figure 151 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade The following table describes the labels in this screen. After you see the firmware updating screen, wait two minutes before logging into the XMG again. DESCRIPTION Table 120 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade LABEL Upgrade Firmware Restore Default Settings After Firmware Upgrade Current Firmware Version File Path Click the check box to have the XMG automatically reset itself after the new firmware is uploaded. This is the present Firmware version and the date created. Type in the location of the file you wasnt to upload in this field or click Choose File to find it. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 232 Chapter 34 Firmware Upgrade Table 120 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade LABEL DESCRIPTION Choose File Click this to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress Upload compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Click this to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes. Figure 152 Firmware Uploading The XMG automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 153 Network Temporarily Disconnected After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 233 CHAPTER 35 Backup/Restore 35.1 Overview The Backup/Restore screen allows you to backup and restore device configurations. You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default. 35.2 The Backup/Restore Screen Click Maintenance > Backup/Restore. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen, as shown next. Figure 154 Maintenance > Backup/Restore Backup Configuration Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the XMGs current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your XMG is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings. Click Backup to save the XMGs current configuration to your computer. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 234 Chapter 35 Backup/Restore Restore Configuration Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your XMG. Table 121 Restore Configuration LABEL File Path Choose File Upload DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Choose File to find it. Click this to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed

(.ZIP) files before you can upload them. Click this to begin the upload process. Do not turn off the XMG while configuration file upload is in progress. After the XMG configuration has been restored successfully, the login screen appears. Login again to restart the XMG. The XMG automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 155 Network Temporarily Disconnected If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address (192.168.1.1). If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the Configuration screen. Figure 156 Configuration Upload Error Reset to Factory Defaults Click the Reset button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the XMG to its factory defaults. The following warning screen appears. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 235 Chapter 35 Backup/Restore Figure 157 Reset Warning Message Figure 158 Reset In Process Message You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your XMG. Refer to Section 1.6 on page 20 for more information on the RESET button. 35.3 The Reboot Screen System restart allows you to reboot the XMG remotely without turning the power off. You may need to do this if the XMG hangs, for example. Click Maintenance > Reboot. Click Reboot to have the XMG reboot. This does not affect the XMG's configuration. Figure 159 Maintenance > Reboot XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 236 CHAPTER 36 Diagnostic 36.1 Overview The Diagnostic screens display information to help you identify problems with the XMG. The route between a CO VDSL switch and one of its CPE may go through switches owned by independent organizations. A connectivity fault point generally takes time to discover and impacts subscribers network access. In order to eliminate the management and maintenance efforts, IEEE 802.1ag is a Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) specification which allows network administrators to identify and manage connection faults. Through discovery and verification of the path, CFM can detect, analyze and isolate connectivity faults in bridged LANs. 36.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup screen lets you ping an IP address or trace the route packets take to a host (Section 36.3 on page 238). The 802.1ag screen lets you perform CFM actions (Section 36.4 on page 238). The OAM Ping screen lets you send an ATM OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) packet to verify the connectivity of a specific PVC. (Section 36.5 on page 239). 36.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. How CFM Works A Maintenance Association (MA) defines a VLAN and associated Maintenance End Point (MEP) ports on the device under a Maintenance Domain (MD) level. An MEP port has the ability to send Connectivity Check Messages (CCMs) and get other MEP ports information from neighbor devices CCMs within an MA. CFM provides two tests to discover connectivity faults. Loopback test - checks if the MEP port receives its Loop Back Response (LBR) from its target after it sends the Loop Back Message (LBM). If no response is received, there might be a connectivity fault between them. Link trace test - provides additional connectivity fault analysis to get more information on where the fault is. If an MEP port does not respond to the source MEP, this may indicate a fault. Administrators can take further action to check and resume services from the fault according to the line connectivity status report. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 237 Chapter 36 Diagnostic 36.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup Use this screen to ping, traceroute, or nslookup an IP address. Click Maintenance > Diagnostic >

Ping&TraceRoute&NsLookup to open the screen shown next. Figure 160 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping & Traceroute & Nslookup The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 122 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup LABEL URL or IP Address Ping TraceRoute DESCRIPTION Type the IP address of a computer that you want to perform ping, traceroute, or nslookup in order to test a connection. Click this to ping the IP address that you entered. Click this button to perform the traceroute function. This determines the path a packet takes to the specified computer. Click this button to perform a DNS lookup on the IP address of a computer you enter. Nslookup 36.4 802.1ag Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag to open the following screen. Use this screen to perform CFM actions. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 238 Chapter 36 Diagnostic Figure 161 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Select a level (0-7) under which you want to create an MA. Enter the target devices MAC address to which the XMG performs a CFM loopback test. Table 123 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag LABEL 802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management Maintenance Domain (MD) Level Destination MAC Address 802.1Q VLAN ID Type a VLAN ID (0-4095) for this MA. VDSL Traffic Type Loopback Message (LBM) Linktrace Message (LTM) Set MD Level Send Loopback Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LBM (Loop Back Message) to a specified This shows how many Loop Back Messages (LBMs) are sent and if there is any inorder or outorder Loop Back Response (LBR) received from a remote MEP. This shows the destination MAC address in the Link Trace Response (LTR). Click this button to configure the MD (Maintenance Domain) level. This shows whether the VDSL traffic is activated. Send Linktrace remote end point. Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LTMs (Link Trace Messages) to a specified remote end point. 36.5 OAM Ping Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping to open the screen shown next. Use this screen to perform an OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) F4 or F5 loopback test on a PVC. The XMG sends an OAM F4 or F5 packet to the DSLAM or ATM switch and then returns it to the XMG. The test result then displays in the text box. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 239 Chapter 36 Diagnostic ATM sets up virtual circuits over which end systems communicate. The terminology for virtual circuits is as follows:

Virtual Channel (VC) Virtual Path (VP) Virtual Circuits Logical connections between ATM devices A bundle of virtual channels A series of virtual paths between circuit end points Figure 162 Virtual Circuit Topology Think of a virtual path as a cable that contains a bundle of wires. The cable connects two points and wires within the cable provide individual circuits between the two points. In an ATM cell header, a VPI

(Virtual Path Identifier) identifies a link formed by a virtual path; a VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) identifies a channel within a virtual path. A series of virtual paths make up a virtual circuit. F4 cells operate at the virtual path (VP) level, while F5 cells operate at the virtual channel (VC) level. F4 cells use the same VPI as the user data cells on VP connections, but use different predefined VCI values. F5 cells use the same VPI and VCI as the user data cells on the VC connections, and are distinguished from data cells by a predefinded Payload Type Identifier (PTI) in the cell header. Both F4 flows and F5 flows are bidirectional and have two types. segment F4 flows (VCI=3) end-to-end F4 flows (VCI=4) segment F5 flows (PTI=100) end-to-end F5 flows (PTI=101) OAM F4 or F5 tests are used to check virtual path or virtual channel availability between two DSL devices. Segment flows are terminated at the connecting point which terminates a VP or VC segment. End-to-end flows are terminated at the end point of a VP or VC connection, where an ATM link is terminated. Segment loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of a PVC to the nearest neighboring ATM device. End-to-end loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of an end-to-end PVC. Note: The DSLAM to which the XMG is connected must also support ATM F4 and/or F5 to use this test. Note: This screen is available only when you configure an ATM layer-2 interface. Figure 163 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 240 Chapter 36 Diagnostic The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 124 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping LABEL DESCRIPTION Select a PVC on which you want to perform the loopback test. Press this to perform an OAM F4 segment loopback test. Press this to perform an OAM F4 end-to-end loopback test. Press this to perform an OAM F5 segment loopback test. Press this to perform an OAM F5 end-to-end loopback test. F4 segment F4 end-end F5 segment F5 end-end XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 241 CHAPTER 37 Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories. Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs XMG Access and Login Internet Access Wireless Internet Access USB Device Connection UPnP 37.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs The XMG does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on. 1 Make sure the XMG is turned on. 2 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the XMG. 3 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the XMG and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on. 4 5 Turn the XMG off and on. If the problem continues, contact the vendor. One of the LEDs does not behave as expected. 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.5 on page 18. 2 Check the hardware connections. 3 4 Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables. Turn the XMG off and on. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 242 Chapter 37 Troubleshooting 5 If the problem continues, contact the vendor. 37.2 XMG Access and Login I forgot the IP address for the XMG. 1 2 3 The default LAN IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the XMG by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the XMG (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address in your Internet browser. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.6 on page 20. I forgot the password. 1 2 See the cover page for the default login names and associated passwords. If those do not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.6 on page 20. I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address. The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address (Section 8.2 on page 112), use the new IP address. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the XMG. 2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See Section 1.5 on page 18. 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled. 4 5 If it is possible to log in from another interface, check the service control settings for HTTP and HTTPS

(Maintenance > Remote MGMT). Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the XMG with the default IP address. See Section 1.6 on page 20. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 243 Chapter 37 Troubleshooting 6 If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestions Make sure you have logged out of any earlier management sessions using the same user account even if they were through a different interface or using a different browser. Try to access the XMG using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the XMG, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the XMG does not respond to HTTP. I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the XMG. 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly. See the cover page for the default login names and associated passwords. The field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 2 3 4 You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the XMG. Log out of the XMG in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out. Turn the XMG off and on. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 37.1 on page 242. I cannot Telnet to the XMG. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload new firmware. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. 37.3 Internet Access I cannot access the Internet. 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.5 on page 18. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 244 Chapter 37 Troubleshooting 2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the Network Setting > Broadband screen. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 3 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure that you enabled the wireless LAN in the XMG and your wireless client and that the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the XMG. 4 Disconnect all the cables from your device and reconnect them. 5 If the problem continues, contact your ISP. I cannot access the Internet through a DSL connection. 1 Make sure you have the DSL WAN port connected to a telephone jack (or the DSL or modem jack on a splitter if you have one). 2 Make sure you configured a proper DSL WAN interface (Network Setting > Broadband screen) with the Internet account information provided by your ISP and that it is enabled. 3 Check that the LAN interface you are connected to is in the same interface group as the DSL connection (Network Setting > Interface Grouping). 4 If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISPs DHCP server. I cannot connect to the Internet using a second DSL connection. ADSL and VDSL connections cannot work at the same time. You can only use one type of DSL connection, either ADSL or VDSL connection at one time. I cannot connect to the Internet using an Ethernet connection. 1 Make sure you have the Ethernet WAN port connected to a modem or router. 2 Make sure you converted LAN port number four as WAN. Click Enable in Network Setting > Broadband >

Ethernet WAN screen. 3 Make sure you configured a proper Ethernet WAN interface (Network Setting > Broadband screen) with the Internet account information provided by your ISP and that it is enabled. 4 Check that the LAN interface you are connected to is in the same interface group as the Ethernet WAN connection (Network Setting > Interface Grouping). 5 If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISPs DHCP server. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 245 Chapter 37 Troubleshooting I cannot access the XMG anymore. I had access to the XMG, but my connection is not available anymore. 1 Your session with the XMG may have expired. Try logging into the XMG again. 2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.5 on page 18. 3 4 Turn the XMG off and on. If the problem continues, contact your vendor. 37.4 Wireless Internet Access What factors may cause intermittent or unstabled wireless connection? How can I solve this problem?

The following factors may cause interference:

Obstacles: walls, ceilings, furniture, and so on. Building Materials: metal doors, aluminum studs. Electrical devices: microwaves, monitors, electric motors, cordless phones, and other wireless devices. To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection, you can:

Move your wireless device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low. Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or surrounding wireless electronics such as cordless phones. Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles (such as walls and ceilings) between the AP and the wireless client. Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously, or add additional APs if necessary. Try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. If the wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information, it may have too many programs open that use the Internet. What is a Server Set ID (SSID)?

An SSID is a name that uniquely identifies a wireless network. The AP and all the clients within a wireless network must use the same SSID. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 246 Chapter 37 Troubleshooting 37.5 USB Device Connection The XMG fails to detect my USB device. 1 Disconnect the USB device. 2 3 4 Reboot the XMG. If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on. Re-connect your USB device to the XMG. 37.6 UPnP When using UPnP and the XMG reboots, my computer cannot detect UPnP and refresh My Network Places > Local Network. 1 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the XMGs LAN port or from your computer. 2 Re-connect the Ethernet cable. The Local Area Connection icon for UPnP disappears in the screen. Restart your computer. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 247 PART III Appendices Appendices contain general information. Some information may not apply to your device. 248 APPENDIX A Customer Support In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a Zyxel office for the region in which you bought the device. See http://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml and also http://www.zyxel.com/about_zyxel/zyxel_worldwide.shtml for the latest information. Please have the following information ready when you contact an office. Required Information Product model and serial number. Warranty Information. Date that you received your device. Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it. Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide) Taiwan Zyxel Communications Corporation http://www.zyxel.com Asia China Zyxel Communications (Shanghai) Corp. Zyxel Communications (Beijing) Corp. Zyxel Communications (Tianjin) Corp. http://www.zyxel.cn India Zyxel Technology India Pvt Ltd http://www.zyxel.in Kazakhstan Zyxel Kazakhstan http://www.zyxel.kz XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 249 Appendix A Customer Support Korea Zyxel Korea Corp. http://www.zyxel.kr Malaysia Zyxel Malaysia Sdn Bhd. http://www.zyxel.com.my Pakistan Zyxel Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd. http://www.zyxel.com.pk Philippines Zyxel Philippines http://www.zyxel.com.ph Singapore Zyxel Singapore Pte Ltd. http://www.zyxel.com.sg Taiwan Zyxel Communications Corporation http://www.zyxel.com/tw/zh/

Thailand Zyxel Thailand Co., Ltd http://www.zyxel.co.th Vietnam Zyxel Communications Corporation-Vietnam Office http://www.zyxel.com/vn/vi Europe Austria Zyxel Deutschland GmbH http://www.zyxel.de Belarus Zyxel BY http://www.zyxel.by XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 250 Appendix A Customer Support Belgium Zyxel Communications B.V. http://www.zyxel.com/be/nl/

http://www.zyxel.com/be/fr/

Bulgaria Zyxel http://www.zyxel.com/bg/bg/

Czech Republic Zyxel Communications Czech s.r.o http://www.zyxel.cz Denmark Zyxel Communications A/S http://www.zyxel.dk Estonia Zyxel Estonia http://www.zyxel.com/ee/et/

Finland Zyxel Communications http://www.zyxel.fi France Zyxel France http://www.zyxel.fr Germany Zyxel Deutschland GmbH http://www.zyxel.de Hungary Zyxel Hungary & SEE http://www.zyxel.hu Italy Zyxel Communications Italy http://www.zyxel.it/

XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 251 Appendix A Customer Support Latvia Zyxel Latvia http://www.zyxel.com/lv/lv/homepage.shtml Lithuania Zyxel Lithuania http://www.zyxel.com/lt/lt/homepage.shtml Netherlands Zyxel Benelux http://www.zyxel.nl Norway Zyxel Communications http://www.zyxel.no Poland Zyxel Communications Poland http://www.zyxel.pl Romania Zyxel Romania http://www.zyxel.com/ro/ro Russia Zyxel Russia http://www.zyxel.ru Slovakia Zyxel Communications Czech s.r.o. organizacna zlozka http://www.zyxel.sk Spain Zyxel Communications ES Ltd http://www.zyxel.es Sweden Zyxel Communications http://www.zyxel.se Switzerland Studerus AG XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 252 Appendix A Customer Support http://www.zyxel.ch/

Turkey Zyxel Turkey A.S. http://www.zyxel.com.tr UK Zyxel Communications UK Ltd. http://www.zyxel.co.uk Ukraine Zyxel Ukraine http://www.ua.zyxel.com Latin America Argentina Zyxel Communication Corporation http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/

Brazil Zyxel Communications Brasil Ltda. https://www.zyxel.com/br/pt/

Ecuador Zyxel Communication Corporation http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/

Middle East Israel Zyxel Communication Corporation http://il.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml Middle East Zyxel Communication Corporation http://www.zyxel.com/me/en/

XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 253 Appendix A Customer Support North America USA Zyxel Communications, Inc. - North America Headquarters http://www.zyxel.com/us/en/

Oceania Africa Australia Zyxel Communications Corporation http://www.zyxel.com/au/en/

South Africa Nology (Pty) Ltd. http://www.zyxel.co.za XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 254 APPENDIX B Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies. Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad-hoc wireless LAN. Figure 164 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network BSS A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 255 Appendix B Wireless LANs Figure 165 Basic Service Set ESS An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System (DS). This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 256 Appendix B Wireless LANs Figure 166 Infrastructure WLAN Channel RTS/CTS A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data. Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your region) so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance. Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11. A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are within range of the access point (AP) or wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they cannot "hear"

each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore, they are considered hidden from each other. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 257 Appendix B Wireless LANs Figure 167 RTS/CTS When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations. RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is invoked. When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS (Request To Send) message to the AP for permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission. Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the "cost"

of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy. Fragmentation Threshold A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes) that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames. A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference. If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 258 Appendix B Wireless LANs IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE 802.11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point (and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:

Table 125 IEEE 802.11g DATA RATE (MBPS) 1 2 5.5 / 11 6/9/12/18/24/36/48/54 OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) MODULATION DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed) DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) CCK (Complementary Code Keying) Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients, access points and the wired network. Wireless security methods available on the XMG are data encryption, wireless client authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the XMG identity. The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your XMG. Table 126 Wireless Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL Least Secure SECURITY TYPE Unique SSID (Default) Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption IEEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) WPA2 Most Secure Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the XMG and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it. IEEE 802.1x In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x are:

User based identification that allows for roaming. Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 259 Appendix B Wireless LANs Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients. RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server handles the following tasks:

Authentication Determines the identity of the users. Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network. Accounting Keeps track of the clients network activity. RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server. Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication:

Access-Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication. Access-Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access. Access-Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access. Access-Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-Request message. The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting:

Accounting-Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting. Accounting-Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting. In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 260 Appendix B Wireless LANs Types of EAP Authentication This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP and LEAP. Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types. EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802.1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication. By using EAP to interact with an EAP-compatible RADIUS server, an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication. The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP(s) that supports IEEE 802.1x. For EAP-TLS authentication type, you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate(s) from a certificate authority (CA). A certificate (also called digital IDs) can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5) MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in plain text. However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication. Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption. EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the senders identity. However, to implement EAP-

TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which imposes a management overhead. EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service) EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server-side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client authentication, EAP-TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2. PEAP (Protected EAP) Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5, EAP-MSCHAPv2 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 261 Appendix B Wireless LANs and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is implemented only by Cisco. LEAP LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x. Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed. If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen. You may still configure and store keys, but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled. Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types. Table 127 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types EAP-TLS Yes Yes Yes Yes Strong Hard No Mutual Authentication Certificate Client Certificate Server Dynamic Key Exchange Credential Integrity Deployment Difficulty Client Identity Protection EAP-MD5 No No No No None Easy No EAP-TTLS Yes Optional Yes Yes Strong Moderate Yes PEAP Yes Optional Yes Yes Strong Moderate Yes LEAP Yes No No Yes Moderate Moderate No WPA and WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA. Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication. If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server, use WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use WPA2-PSK

(WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN. If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 262 Appendix B Wireless LANs Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2. Encryption WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity Check

(MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA2 also uses TKIP when required for compatibility reasons, but offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP). TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server. AES

(Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael. They both include a per-packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying mechanism. WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice. The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. This all happens in the background automatically. The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets, altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped. By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi-Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force password-

guessing attacks but its still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent, single, alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a weakness of WEP) User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake) and shortens the time required to connect to a network. Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre-authentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices. Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again. Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 263 Appendix B Wireless LANs Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP, Funk Software's Odyssey client. The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP's built-in "Zero Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows XP to use it. WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example To set up WPA(2), you need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number (default is 1812), and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows. "A"

is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system. 1 2 The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly. 3 A 256-bit Pairwise Master Key (PMK) is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client. 4 The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP. The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys. The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. Figure 168 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example WPA(2)-PSK Application Example A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows. 1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters (including spaces and symbols). XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 264 Appendix B Wireless LANs 2 3 4 The AP checks each wireless client's password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches. The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key). The key itself is not sent over the network, but is derived from the PSK and the SSID. The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process, the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys. They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them. Figure 169 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features. Table 128 Wireless Security Relational Matrix AUTHENTICATION METHOD/

KEY MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Open ENCRYPTION METHOD None Open Shared WPA WPA-PSK WPA2 WPA2-PSK WEP WEP TKIP/AES TKIP/AES TKIP/AES TKIP/AES ENTER MANUAL KEY IEEE 802.1X No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 265 Appendix B Wireless LANs Antenna Overview An antenna couples RF signals onto air. A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna, which propagates the signal through the air. The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air. Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN. Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2.4GHz (IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g) or 5GHz (IEEE 802.11a) is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antennas coverage area. Antenna Gain Antenna gain, measured in dB (decibel), is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width. Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications. For an indoor site, each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 2.5%. For an unobstructed outdoor site, each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 5%. Actual results may vary depending on the network environment. Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi, which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna. An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions. dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides. Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications. Omni-directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane. The coverage area is torus-shaped (like a donut) which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment. With a wide coverage area, it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points. Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam, like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb. The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern. Angles typically range from 20 degrees (very directional) to 120 degrees (less directional). Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point-to-point applications. Positioning Antennas In general, antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions. In point-topoint application, position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 266 Appendix B Wireless LANs For omni-directional antennas mounted on a table, desk, and so on, point the antenna up. For omni-

directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling, point the antenna down. For a single AP application, place omni-directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible. For directional antennas, point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 267 APPENDIX C Services The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port numbers. Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a different one, if you like. Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/UDP, then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is USER-DEFINED, the Port(s) is the IP protocol number, not the port number. Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol. If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number. If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number. Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 268 Appendix C Services Table 129 Examples of Services NAME AH (IPSEC_TUNNEL) PROTOCOL User-Defined PORT(S) 51 AIM AUTH BGP BOOTP_CLIENT BOOTP_SERVER CU-SEEME DNS TCP TCP TCP UDP UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP ESP (IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined FINGER FTP H.323 HTTP HTTPS ICMP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP User-Defined ICQ IGMP (MULTICAST) UDP User-Defined IKE IMAP4 IMAP4S IRC MSN Messenger NetBIOS NEW-ICQ NEWS UDP TCP TCP TCP/UDP TCP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP TCP 5190 113 179 68 67 7648 24032 53 50 79 20 21 1720 80 443 1 4000 2 500 143 993 6667 1863 137 138 139 445 5190 144 DESCRIPTION The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling protocol uses this service. AOLs Internet Messenger service. Authentication protocol used by some servers. Border Gateway Protocol. DHCP Client. DHCP Server. A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software. Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (for instance www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers. The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service. Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on. File Transfer Protocol, a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail. NetMeeting uses this protocol. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/server protocol for the world wide web. HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-

commerce. Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic purposes. This is a popular Internet chat program. Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts. The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management. The Internet Message Access Protocol is used for e-

mail. This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that runs over SSL. This is another popular Internet chat program. Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol. The Network Basic Input/Output System is used for communication between computers in a LAN. An Internet chat program. A protocol for news groups. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 269 Appendix C Services Table 129 Examples of Services (continued) NAME NFS NNTP PING POP3 POP3S PPTP PROTOCOL UDP PORT(S) 2049 TCP User-Defined TCP TCP TCP 119 1 110 995 1723 PPTP_TUNNEL (GRE) User-Defined 47 RCMD REAL_AUDIO REXEC RLOGIN ROADRUNNER RTELNET RTSP SFTP SMTP SMTPS SNMP SNMP-TRAPS SQL-NET SSDP SSH STRM WORKS SYSLOG TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP/UDP TCP TCP/UDP TCP TCP TCP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP UDP TCP/UDP UDP UDP 512 7070 514 513 1026 107 554 115 25 465 161 162 1521 1900 22 1558 514 DESCRIPTION Network File System - NFS is a client/server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments. Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service. Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable. Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other). This is a more secure version of POP3 that runs over SSL. Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel. PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel. Remote Command Service. A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web. Remote Execution Daemon. Remote Login. This is an ISP that provides services mainly for cable modems. Remote Telnet. The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol

(RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet. The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old way of transferring files between computers. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-

exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another. This is a more secure version of SMTP that runs over SSL. Simple Network Management Program. Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215). Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers. The Simple Service Discovery Protocol supports Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP). Secure Shell Remote Login Program. Stream Works Protocol. Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 270 Appendix C Services Table 129 Examples of Services (continued) NAME TACACS TELNET VDOLIVE PROTOCOL UDP TCP TCP UDP PORT(S) 49 23 7000 user-

defined DESCRIPTION Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System). Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems. A videoconferencing solution. The UDP port number is specified in the application. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 271 APPENDIX D Legal Information Copyright Disclaimer Copyright 2016 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved. ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice. Regulatory Notice and Statement UNITED STATES of AMERICA The following information applies if you use the product within USA area. FCC EMC Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the device. This product has been tested and complies with the specifications for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used according to the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which is found by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the devices Connect the equipment to an outlet other than the receivers Consult a dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for assistance The following information applies if you use the product with RF function within USA area. FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This device complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This transmitter must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. FCC Part 68 Statement This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US: 1RODL01AXMG3512. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company. List all applicable certification jack Universal Service Order Codes (USOC) for the equipment. USOC JACK: RJ14 A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 272 Appendix D Legal Information The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this equipment US: 1RODL01AXMG3512 causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment US: 1RODL01AXMG3512, for repair or warranty information, please contact:

Company Name: ZyXEL Communication Inc. Address: 1130 N Miller street Anaheim, CA 92806-2001, USA TEL: 002 +1 714-6320882 FAX: 002 +1 714-6320858 If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. corporation commission for information. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this US: 1RODL01AXMG3512 does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. CANADA The following information applies if you use the product within Canada area. Industry Canada ICES statement CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) Industry Canada RSS-GEN & RSS-247 statement This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This radio transmitter 2468C-XMG3512B10A has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Antenna Information TYPE Dipole MANUFACTURER ACON GAIN

-0.54 CONNECTOR Ipex If the product with 5G wireless function operating in 5150-5250 MHz and 5725-5850 MHz, the following attention must be paid. The device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate; and The worst-case tilt angle(s) necessary to remain compliant with the e.i.r.p. elevation mask requirement set forth in Section 6.2.2(3) of RSS 247 mobile satellite systems. shall be clearly indicated. If the produce with 5G wireless function operating in 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz , the following attention must be paid. For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limit Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage; (2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement. Le prsent metteur radio 2468C-XMG3512B10A de modle s'il fait partie du matriel de catgorieI) a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenne numrs ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal et l'impdance requise pour chaque type d'antenne. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, ou dont le gain est suprieur au gain maximal indiqu, sont strictement interdits pour l'exploitation de l'metteur. Informations Antenne TYPE Dipole FABRICANT ACON GAIN

-0.54 CONNECTEUR Ipex Lorsque la fonction sans fil 5G fonctionnant en5150-5250 MHz and 5725-5850 MHz est active pour ce produit , il est ncessaire de porter une attention particulire aux choses suivantes XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 273 Appendix D Legal Information Les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;

Pour les dispositifs munis dantennes amovibles, le gain maximal d'antenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande de 5 725 5 850 MHz) doit tre conforme la limite de la p.i.r.e. spcifie pour l'exploitation point point et lexploitation non point point, selon le cas;

Les pires angles dinclinaison ncessaires pour rester conforme lexigence de la p.i.r.e. applicable au masque dlvation, et nonce la section 6.2.2 3) du CNR-247, doivent tre clairement indiqus. Lorsque la fonction sans fil 5G fonctionnant en 5250-5350 MHz et 5470-5725 MHz est active pour ce produit , il est ncessaire de porter une attention particulire aux choses suivantes Pour les dispositifs munis dantennes amovibles, le gain maximal d'antenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes de 5 250 5 350 MHz et de 5 470 5 725 MHz doit tre conforme la limite de la p.i.r.e. Industry Canada radiation exposure statement This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. Dclaration dexposition aux radiations:

Cet quipement est conforme aux limites dexposition aux rayonnements IC tablies pour un environnement non contrl.Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps. Industry Canada CS-03 statement This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) indicates the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five. Dclaration de conformit Le prsent produit est conforme aux spcifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada. L'indice d'quivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert indiquer le nombre maximal de dispositifs qui peuvent tre raccords une interface tlphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, la seule condition que la somme des IES de tous les dispositifs n'excde pas cinq. EUROPEAN UNION The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union. Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive) Compliance information for 2.4GHz and/or 5GHz wireless products relevant to the EU and other Countries following the EU Directive 1999/5/

EC (R&TTE). This device is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5350 MHz frequency range.

(Bulgarian) ZyXEL , 1999/5/C. Espaol

(Spanish) etina

(Czech) Por medio de la presente ZyXEL declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. ZyXEL tmto prohlauje, e tento zazen je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/EC. Dansk (Danish) Undertegnede ZyXEL erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr udstyr overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Deutsch

(German) Eesti keel

(Estonian)

(Greek) English Franais

(French) Hrvatski

(Croatian) Hiermit erklrt ZyXEL, dass sich das Gert Ausstattung in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU befindet. Kesolevaga kinnitab ZyXEL seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. ZyXEL 1999/5/C. Hereby, ZyXEL declares that this device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Par la prsente ZyXEL dclare que l'appareil quipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL ovime izjavljuje da je radijska oprema tipa u skladu s Direktivom 1999/5/EC. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 274 Appendix D Legal Information slenska

(Icelandic) Hr me lsir, ZyXEL v yfir a essi bnaur er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og nnur vieigandi kvi tilskipunar 1999/5/

EC. Italiano (Italian) Con la presente ZyXEL dichiara che questo attrezzatura conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Latvieu valoda

(Latvian) Lietuvi kalba

(Lithuanian) Magyar

(Hungarian) Malti (Maltese) Nederlands

(Dutch) Polski (Polish) Portugus

(Portuguese) Romn

(Romanian) Slovenina

(Slovak) Slovenina

(Slovene) Ar o ZyXEL deklar, ka iekrtas atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. iuo ZyXEL deklaruoja, kad is ranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Alulrott, ZyXEL nyilatkozom, hogy a berendezs megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EK irnyelv egyb elrsainak. Hawnhekk, ZyXEL, jiddikjara li dan tagmir jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC. Hierbij verklaart ZyXEL dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EC. Niniejszym ZyXEL owiadcza, e sprzt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL declara que este equipamento est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/

EC. Prin prezenta, ZyXEL declar c acest echipament este n conformitate cu cerinele eseniale i alte prevederi relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL tmto vyhlasuje, e zariadenia spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL izjavlja, da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili direktive 1999/5/EC. Suomi (Finnish) ZyXEL vakuuttaa tten ett laitteet tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Svenska

(Swedish) Hrmed intygar ZyXEL att denna utrustning str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EC. Norsk

(Norwegian) Erklrer herved ZyXEL at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante bestemmelser I direktiv 1999/5/EF. National Restrictions This product may be used in all EU countries (and other countries following the EU Directive 1999/5/EC) without any limitation except for the Ce produit peut tre utilis dans tous les pays de lUE (et dans tous les pays ayant transposs la directive 1999/5/CE) sans aucune limitation, Questo prodotto utilizzabile in tutte i paesi EU (ed in tutti gli altri paesi che seguono le direttiva 1999/5/EC) senza nessuna limitazione, countries mentioned below:

except pour les pays mentionns ci-dessous:

eccetto per i paesii menzionati di seguito:

Das Produkt kann in allen EU Staaten ohne Einschrnkungen eingesetzt werden (sowie in anderen Staaten die der Richtlinie 1999/5/CE folgen) mit Aunahme der folgenden aufgefhrten Staaten:

In the majority of the EU and other European countries, the 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands have been made available for the use of wireless local area networks (LANs). Later in this document you will find an overview of countries in which additional restrictions or requirements or both are applicable. The requirements for any country may evolve. ZyXEL recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of their national regulations for both the 2.4GHz and 5GHz wireless LANs. The following countries have restrictions and/or requirements in addition to those given in the table labeled Overview of Regulatory Requirements for Wireless LANs:. Belgium The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range exceeding 300 meters. Please check http://www.bipt.be for more details. Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie http://www.bipt.be voor meer gegevens. Les liaisons sans fil pour une utilisation en extrieur dune distance suprieure 300 mtres doivent tre notifies lInstitut Belge des services Postaux et des Tlcommunications (IBPT). Visitez http://www.ibpt.be pour de plus amples dtails. Denmark In Denmark, the band 5150 - 5350 MHz is also allowed for outdoor usage. I Danmark m frekvensbndet 5150 - 5350 ogs anvendes udendrs. Italy This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy. Unless this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner's property, its use requires a general authorization. Please check http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ for more details. Questo prodotto conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in Italia. Se non viene installato all 'interno del proprio fondo, l'utilizzo di prodotti Wireless LAN richiede una Autorizzazione Generale. Consultare http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ per maggiori dettagli. Latvia The outdoor usage of the 2.4 GHz band requires an authorization from the Electronic Communications Office. Please check http://

2.4 GHz frekvenu joslas izmantoanai rpus telpm nepiecieama atauja no Elektronisko sakaru direkcijas. Vairk informcijas: http://

www.esd.lv for more details. www.esd.lv. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 275 Appendix D Legal Information Notes:

1. Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 1999/5/EC has also been implemented in those countries. 2. The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP. The EIRP level (in dBm) of a device can be calculated by adding the gain of the antenna used(specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector (specified in dBm). List of national codes COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE Austria Belgium Bulgaria Croatia Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia AT BE BG HR CY CZ DK EE FI FR DE GR HU IS IE IT LV Safety Warnings Liechtenstein Lithuania Luxembourg Malta Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Romania Serbia Slovakia Slovenia Spain Switzerland Sweden Turkey United Kingdom LI LT LU MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SK SI ES CH SE TR GB Do not use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Do not expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids. Do not store things on the device. Do not obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device. For example, do not place the device in an enclosed space such as a box or on a very soft surface such as a bed or sofa. Do not install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device. Do not open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information. Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports. Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them. Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling. Do not remove the plug and connect it to a power outlet by itself; always attach the plug to the power adaptor first before connecting it to Do not allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor a power outlet. or cord. Please use the provided or designated connection cables/power cables/ adaptors. Connect it to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, it might cause electrocution. Remove it from the device and the power source, repairing the power adapter or cord is prohibited. Contact your local vendor to order a new one. Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type, dispose of used batteries according to the instruction. Dispose them at the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic devices. For detailed information about recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product. The following warning statements apply, where the disconnect device is not incorporated in the device or where the plug on the power supply cord is intended to serve as the disconnect device,

- For permanently connected devices, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated external to the device;

- For pluggable devices, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the device and shall be easily accessible. The RJ-45 jacks are not used for telephone line connection. To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Always disconnect all telephone lines from the wall outlet before servicing or disassembling this product. Les prises RJ-45 ne sont pas utiliss pour la connexion de la ligne tlphonique. Pour rduire les risques d'incendie n'utiliser que des cbles de type 26 AWG ou des cbles de connexion plus pais Ne pas utiliser ce produit prs de l'eau, par exemple un sous-sol humide ou prs d'une piscine. vitez d'utiliser ce produit (autre qu'un type sans fil) pendant un orage. Il peut y avoir un risque de choc lectrique de la foudre. Toujours dbrancher toutes les lignes tlphoniques de la prise murale avant de rparer ou de dmonter ce produit. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 276 Appendix D Legal Information Environment Statement ErP (Energy-related Products) ZyXEL products put on the EU market in compliance with the requirement of the European Parliament and the Council published Directive 2009/

125/EC establishing a framework for the setting of ecodesign requirements for energy-related products (recast), so called as "ErP Directive

(Energy-related Products directive) as well as ecodesign requirement laid down in applicable implementing measures, power consumption has satisfied regulation requirements which are:

Network standby power consumption < 8W, and/or Off mode power consumption < 0.5W, and/or Standby mode power consumption < 0.5W.

(Wireless setting, please refer to "Wireless" chapter for more detail.) European Union - Disposal and Recycling Information The symbol below means that according to local regulations your product and/or its battery shall be disposed of separately from domestic waste. If this product is end of life, take it to a recycling station designated by local authorities. At the time of disposal, the separate collection of your product and/or its battery will help save natural resources and ensure that the environment is sustainable development. Die folgende Symbol bedeutet, dass Ihr Produkt und/oder seine Batterie gem den rtlichen Bestimmungen getrennt vom Hausmll entsorgt werden muss. Wenden Sie sich an eine Recyclingstation, wenn dieses Produkt das Ende seiner Lebensdauer erreicht hat. Zum Zeitpunkt der Entsorgung wird die getrennte Sammlung von Produkt und/oder seiner Batterie dazu beitragen, natrliche Ressourcen zu sparen und die Umwelt und die menschliche Gesundheit zu schtzen. El smbolo de abajo indica que segn las regulaciones locales, su producto y/o su batera debern depositarse como basura separada de la domstica. Cuando este producto alcance el final de su vida til, llvelo a un punto limpio. Cuando llegue el momento de desechar el producto, la recogida por separado ste y/o su batera ayudar a salvar los recursos naturales y a proteger la salud humana y medioambiental. Le symbole ci-dessous signifie que selon les rglementations locales votre produit et/ou sa batterie doivent tre limins sparment des ordures mnagres. Lorsque ce produit atteint sa fin de vie, amenez-le un centre de recyclage. Au moment de la mise au rebut, la collecte spare de votre produit et/ou de sa batterie aidera conomiser les ressources naturelles et protger l'environnement et la sant humaine. Il simbolo sotto significa che secondo i regolamenti locali il vostro prodotto e/o batteria deve essere smaltito separatamente dai rifiuti domestici. Quando questo prodotto raggiunge la fine della vita di servizio portarlo a una stazione di riciclaggio. Al momento dello smaltimento, la raccolta separata del vostro prodotto e/o della sua batteria aiuta a risparmiare risorse naturali e a proteggere l'ambiente e la salute umana. Symbolen innebr att enligt lokal lagstiftning ska produkten och/eller dess batteri kastas separat frn hushllsavfallet. Nr den hr produkten nr slutet av sin livslngd ska du ta den till en tervinningsstation. Vid tiden fr kasseringen bidrar du till en bttre milj och mnsklig hlsa genom att gra dig av med den p ett tervinningsstlle. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 277 Appendix D Legal Information Environmental Product Declaration XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 278 Appendix D Legal Information 5.25-5.35 5.25-5.35

- :

:

- -

- -

( : / 110V AC 230V AC)

:

-

-

About the Symbols Various symbols are used in this product to ensure correct usage, to prevent danger to the user and others, and to prevent property damage. The meaning of these symbols are described below. It is important that you read these descriptions thoroughly and fully understand the contents. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 279 Appendix D Legal Information Explanation of the Symbols SYMBOL EXPLANATION Alternating current (AC):

AC is an electric current in which the flow of electric charge periodically reverses direction. Direct current (DC):

DC if the unidirectional flow or movement of electric charge carriers. Earth; ground:

A wiring terminal intended for connection of a Protective Earthing Conductor. Class II equipment:

The method of protection against electric shock in the case of class II equipment is either double insulation or reinforced insulation. Viewing Certifications Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this products documentation and certifications. ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period (the Warranty Period) from the date of purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. Note Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser. To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php. Registration Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products. Open Source Licenses This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. Open source licenses are provided with the firmware package. You can download the latest firmware at www.zyxel.com. To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses, please contact support@zyxel.com.tw to get it. XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 280 Index Index A ACL rule 185 activation firewalls 182 media server 180 SIP ALG 158 SSID 89 Address Resolution Protocol 209 administrator password 23 antenna directional 266 gain 266 omni-directional 266 AP (access point) 257 applications Internet access 16 media server 179 activation 180 iTunes server 179 applications, NAT 162 ARP Table 209, 211 authentication 99, 100 RADIUS server 100 B backup configuration 234 Basic Service Set, See BSS 255 Basic Service Set, see BSS blinking LEDs 19 Broadband 61 broadcast 81 BSS 102, 255 example 102 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 281 Index C CA 197, 261 Canonical Format Indicator See CFI CCMs 237 certificate factory default 198 Certificate Authority See CA. certificates 197 authentication 197 CA creating 198 public key 197 replacing 198 storage space 198 Certification Authority 197 Certification Authority. see CA certifications 276 viewing 280 CFI 81 CFM 237 CCMs 237 link trace test 237 loopback test 237 MA 237 MD 237 MEP 237 MIP 237 channel 257 interference 257 channel, wireless LAN 98 client list 116 configuration backup 234 firewalls 182 reset 235 restoring 235 static route 77, 125, 127, 166 Connectivity Check Messages, see CCMs contact information 249 copyright 272 CoS 145 CoS technologies 132 creating certificates 198 CTS (Clear to Send) 258 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 282 Index CTS threshold 95, 99 customer support 249 D data fragment threshold 95, 99 DDoS 182 default server address 157 Denials of Service, see DoS DHCP 111, 123 DHCP option 43 68 DHCP option 60 67 DHCP option 61 DUID 67 IAD 67 Differentiated Services, see DiffServ 145 DiffServ 145 marking rule 145 digital IDs 197 disclaimer 272 DLNA 179 DMZ 157 DNS 111, 123 DNS server address assignment 81 Domain Name 163 Domain Name System, see DNS Domain Name System. See DNS. DoS 182 DS field 145 DS, dee differentiated services DSCP 145 dynamic DNS 165 wildcard 165 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCP dynamic WEP key exchange 262 DYNDNS wildcard 165 E EAP Authentication 261 ECHO 163 e-mail XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 283 Index log example 230 Encapsulation 77 MER 78 PPP over Ethernet 78 encapsulation RFC 1483 78 encryption 101, 263 ESS 256 Extended Service Set IDentification 85, 90 Extended Service Set, See ESS 256 F file sharing 17 filters MAC address 91, 100 Finger 163 firewalls 181 add protocols 183 configuration 182 DDoS 182 DoS 182 LAND attack 182 Ping of Death 182 SYN attack 182 firmware 232 version 58 forwarding ports 150 fragmentation threshold 95, 99, 258 FTP 150, 163 G General wireless LAN screen 84 H hidden node 257 HTTP 163 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 284 Index I IBSS 255 IEEE 802.11g 259 IEEE 802.1Q 81 IGA 161 IGMP 81 multicast group list 213 version 81 ILA 161 Independent Basic Service Set See IBSS 255 initialization vector (IV) 263 Inside Global Address, see IGA Inside Local Address, see ILA interface group 171 Internet wizard setup 30 Internet access 16 wizard setup 30 Internet Protocol version 6 62 IP address 111 ping 238 WAN 62 IP Address Assignment 80 IP alias NAT applications 163 IPv6 62 addressing 63, 82 prefix 63, 82 prefix delegation 64 prefix length 63, 82 iTunes server 179 L LAN 110 client list 116 DHCP 111, 123 DNS 111, 123 IP address 111, 112 MAC address 116 status 59 subnet mask 111, 112 LAND attack 182 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 285 Index LBR 237 limitations wireless LAN 101 WPS 108 link trace 237 Link Trace Message, see LTM Link Trace Response, see LTR login 23 passwords 23 logs 203, 206, 213, 229 Loop Back Response, see LBR loopback 237 LTM 237 LTR 237 M MA 237 MAC address 92, 116 filter 91, 100 MAC authentication 91 Mac filter 188 Maintenance Association, see MA Maintenance Domain, see MD Maintenance End Point, see MEP Management Information Base (MIB) 223 managing the device good habits 15 Maximum Burst Size (MBS) 79 MBSSID 102 MD 237 media server 179 activation 180 iTunes server 179 MEP 237 MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) 80 multicast 81 Multiple BSS, see MBSSID multiplexing 78 LLC-based 79 VC-based 78 multiprotocol encapsulation 78 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 286 Index N NAT 149, 150, 151, 161 applications 162 IP alias 163 example 162 global 161 IGA 161 ILA 161 inside 161 local 161 outside 161 port forwarding 150 port number 163 services 163 SIP ALG 158 activation 158 NAT example 164 Network Address Translation, see NAT Network Map 56 network map 26 NNTP 163 P Pairwise Master Key (PMK) 263, 265 passwords 23 PBC 103 Peak Cell Rate (PCR) 79 Per-Hop Behavior, see PHB 145 PHB 145 PIN, WPS 104 example 105 Ping of Death 182 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol, see PPTP POP3 163 port forwarding 150 ports 19 PPPoE 78 Benefits 78 PPTP 163 preamble 96, 99 preamble mode 103 prefix delegation 64 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 287 Index PSK 263 Push Button Configuration, see PBC push button, WPS 103 Q QoS 131, 145 marking 132 setup 131 tagging 132 versus CoS 132 Quality of Service, see QoS R RADIUS 260 message types 260 messages 260 shared secret key 260 RADIUS server 100 reset 20, 235 restart 236 restoring configuration 235 RFC 1058. See RIP. RFC 1389. See RIP. RFC 1483 78 RFC 3164 203 RIP 129 router features 16 Routing Information Protocol. See RIP RTS (Request To Send) 258 threshold 257, 258 RTS threshold 95, 99 S security wireless LAN 99 Security Log 204 Security Parameter Index, see SPI service access control 220, 221 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 288 Index Service Set 85, 90 Services 163 setup firewalls 182 static route 77, 125, 127, 166 Simple Network Management Protocol, see SNMP Single Rate Three Color Marker, see srTCM SIP ALG 158 activation 158 SMTP 163 SNMP 163, 223, 224 agents 223 Get 224 GetNext 224 Manager 223 managers 223 MIB 223 network components 223 Set 224 Trap 224 versions 223 SNMP trap 163 SPI 182 srTCM 147 SSID 100 activation 89 MBSSID 102 static route 124, 129, 227 configuration 77, 125, 127, 166 example 124 static VLAN status 56 firmware version 58 LAN 59 WAN 58 wireless LAN 59 status indicators 19 subnet mask 111 Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) 79 SYN attack 182 syslog protocol 203 severity levels 203 system firmware 232 version 58 passwords 23 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 289 Index reset 20 status 56 LAN 59 WAN 58 wireless LAN 59 time 225 T Tag Control Information See TCI Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID TCI The 62 thresholds data fragment 95, 99 RTS/CTS 95, 99 time 225 TPID 81 traffic shaping 79 trTCM 148 Two Rate Three Color Marker, see trTCM U unicast 81 Universal Plug and Play, see UPnP upgrading firmware 232 UPnP 117 cautions 112 NAT traversal 111 USB features 17 V Vendor ID 121 VID Virtual Circuit (VC) 78 Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN VLAN 80 Introduction 80 number of possible VIDs priority frame XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 290 Index static VLAN ID 81 VLAN Identifier See VID VLAN tag 81 W Wake on LAN 121 WAN status 58 Wide Area Network, see WAN 61 warranty 280 note 280 web configurator 23 login 23 passwords 23 WEP 101 WEP Encryption 87, 88 WEP encryption 86 WEP key 86 Wi-Fi Protected Access 262 wireless client WPA supplicants 264 wireless LAN 83, 97 authentication 99, 100 BSS 102 example 102 channel 98 encryption 101 example 98 fragmentation threshold 95, 99 limitations 101 MAC address filter 91, 100 MBSSID 102 preamble 96, 99 RADIUS server 100 RTS/CTS threshold 95, 99 security 99 SSID 100 activation 89 status 59 WEP 101 WPA 101 WPA-PSK 101 WPS 103, 105 example 106 limitations 108 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 291 Index PIN 104 push button 103 wireless security 259 Wireless tutorial 38 wizard setup Internet 30 WLAN interference 257 security parameters 265 WPA 101, 262 key caching 263 pre-authentication 263 user authentication 263 vs WPA-PSK 263 wireless client supplicant 264 with RADIUS application example 264 WPA2 262 user authentication 263 vs WPA2-PSK 263 wireless client supplicant 264 with RADIUS application example 264 WPA2-Pre-Shared Key 262 WPA2-PSK 262, 263 application example 264 WPA-PSK 101, 262, 263 application example 264 WPS 103, 105 example 106 limitations 108 PIN 104 example 105 push button 103 Z ZyXEL Family Safety page 193 XMG3512-B10A Users Guide 292

Project No.: EP651003 Page No. : 5 of 13 Project No.: EP651003 Page No. : 6 of 13 Project No.: EP651003 Page No. : 7 of 13 Project No.: EP651003 Page No. : 8 of 13 Project No.: EP651003 Page No. : 9 of 13 Project No.: EP651003 Page No. : 10 of 13 Project No.: EP651003 Page No. : 11 of 13 Project No.: EP651003 Page No. : 12 of 13 Project No.: EP651003 Page No. : 13 of 13

Photographs of EUT Project No.: EP651003 Page No. : 1 of 13 Project No.: EP651003 Page No. : 2 of 13 Project No.: EP651003 Page No. : 3 of 13 Project No.: EP651003 Page No. : 4 of 13

100# White Polyester/ 100# +

1. Material :

2. Adhesive : Acrylic with depressive liner /

3. Coating : NA 4. Background Color : Pantone Black C 5. Text Color : White 6. Other : UL /

2.5mm

+/- 0.5mm 2.5mm 119mm D u a l

-

B a n d W l i r e e s s A C

/

N V D S L 2 B o n d n g G a t e w a y w i U L L i s t e d o r C S A C e r t i

e d T e e c o m m u n i c a t i o n L n e C o r d l i C a u t i o n

:

t o r e d u c e t h e r i s k o f

r e

, u s e o n l y N O 2 6 A W G o r l

. a r g e r

(

e g

.

, 2 4 A W G

) l i c e n s e s

. l P e a s e v i s i t

. w w w u s

. z y x e l

. c o m

/

o p e n s o u r c e

/

f o r s o u r c e c o d e a n d a d d i t i o n a l i n f o r m a t i o n

. T h i s p r o d u c t c o n t a n s i i n p a r t s o m e f r e e s o f t w a r e d i s t r i b u t e d u n d e r G P L l i c e n s e t e r m s a n d

/

o r G P L l i k e P o w e r R a t i n g

:

1 2 V

,

. 3 5 A U S O C J A C K R J 1 4

:

I C I D

:

2 4 6 8 C X M G 3 5 1 2 B 1 0 A U S

:

1 R O D L 0 1 B X M G 3 5 1 2 C A N I C E S

-

3

(

B

)

/

N M B

-

3

(

B

) F C C I D

:

I 8 8 X M G 3 5 1 2

-

B 1 0 A t w o c o n d i t i o n s

:

i n t e r f e r e n c e t h a t m a y c a u s e u n d e s i r e d o p e r a t i o n

.

(

1

) t h i s d e v i c e m a y n o t c a u s e h a r m f u l i n t e r f e r e n c e

, a n d

(

2

) t h i s d e v i c e m u s t a c c e p t a n y i n t e r f e r e n c e r e c e v e d i

, i n c l u d n g i T h i s p r o d u c t c o m p l i e s w i t h F C C 4 7 C F R P a r t 6 8

. T h i s d e v i c e c o m p l i e s w i t h P a r t 1 5 o f t h e F C C R u e s

/

I n d u s t r y C a n a d a l l i c e n c e

-

e x e m p t R S S s t a n d a r d

(

s

)

. O p e r a t i o n j i s s u b e c t t o t h e f o l l o w n g i 3 P P H R E N

:

0

. 1 A R E N

:

0

. 1 A t w o c o n d i t i o n s

:

i n t e r f e r e n c e t h a t m a y c a u s e u n d e s i r e d o p e r a t i o n

.

(

1

) t h i s d e v i c e m a y n o t c a u s e h a r m f u l i n t e r f e r e n c e

, a n d

(

2

) t h i s d e v i c e m u s t a c c e p t a n y i n t e r f e r e n c e r e c e v e d i

, i n c l u d n g i T h i s p r o d u c t c o m p l i e s w i t h F C C 4 7 C F R P a r t 6 8

. T h i s d e v i c e c o m p l i e s w i t h P a r t 1 5 o f t h e F C C R u e s

/

I n d u s t r y C a n a d a l l i c e n c e

-

e x e m p t R S S s t a n d a r d

(

s

)

. O p e r a t i o n j i s s u b e c t t o t h e f o l l o w n g i U L L i s t e d o r C S A C e r t i

e d T e e c o m m u n i c a t i o n L n e C o r d l i C a u t i o n

:

t o r e d u c e t h e r i s k o f

r e

, u s e o n l y N O 2 6 A W G o r l

. l i c e n s e s

. l P e a s e v i s i t

. w w w u s

. z y x e l

. c o m

/

o p e n s o u r c e

/

f o r s o u r c e c o d e a n d a d d i t i o n a l i n f o r m a t i o n

. T h i s p r o d u c t c o n t a n s i i n p a r t s o m e f r e e s o f t w a r e d i s t r i b u t e d u n d e r G P L l i c e n s e t e r m s a n d

/

o r G P L l i k e P o w e r R a t i n g

:

1 2 V

,

. 3 5 A U S O C J A C K R J 1 4

:

I C I D

:

2 4 6 8 C X M G 3 5 1 2 B 1 0 A U S

:

1 R O D L 0 1 B X M G 3 5 1 2 C A N I C E S

-

3

(

B

)

/

N M B

-

3

(

B

) F C C I D

:

I 8 8 X M G 3 5 1 2

-

B 1 0 A a r g e r

(

e g

.

, 2 4 A W G

) 3 P P H i t h U S B 4mm D u a l

-

B a n d W l i r e e s s A C

/

N V D S L 2 B o n d n g G a t e w a y w i i t h U S B Model Number:XMG3512-B10A This product complies with FCC 47CFR Part 68. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules/Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) FCC ID: I88XMG3512-B10A US: 1RODL01BXMG3512 IC ID: 2468CXMG3512B10A USOC JACK:RJ14 REN: 0.1A Power Rating: 12V ,3.5A Caution: to reduce the risk of re, use only NO.26AWG or larger(e.g.,24AWG) UL Listed or CSA Certied Telecommunication Line Cord This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. Please visit www.us.zyxel.com/opensource/ for source code and additional information. 3PPH Dual-Band Wireless AC/N VDSL2 Bonding Gateway with USB 79mm C=2.7mm Model Number:XMG3512-B10A Serial Number: S160Y03010835 MAC Address: E8377AFB135A SSID (2.4GHz):

SSID (5-GHz):

Wireless Key:

Default IP Address:

Username:

Password:

Zyxel_1354 Zyxel_1354_5G URTPPHJJED 192.168.1.1 admin 1234 This product complies with FCC 47CFR Part 68. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules/Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) FCC ID: I88XMG3512-B10A US: 1RODL01BXMG3512 IC ID: 2468CXMG3512B10A USOC JACK:RJ14 REN: 0.1A Power Rating: 12V ,3.5A Caution: to reduce the risk of re, use only NO.26AWG or larger(e.g.,24AWG) UL Listed or CSA Certied Telecommunication Line Cord This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. Please visit www.us.zyxel.com/opensource/ for source code and additional information. 3PPH Dual-Band Wireless AC/N VDSL2 Bonding Gateway with USB Example Of Factory Printing Location Print Color : White M o d e l

:

N u m b e r X M G 3 5 1 2

-

B 1 0 A M o d e l

:

N u m b e r X M G 3 5 1 2

-

B 1 0 A Material Made 1. SYMBOL MEANS IMPORTANT SIZE. 2. SYMBOL MEANS IMPORTANT ITEM. 3. SYMBOL MEANS ILLUSTRATE. 4. THIS PART SHOULD NOT CONTAIN AND SUBSTANCES WHICH ARE SPECIFIED IN SPT-00001; SPT-00002 (WHEN SPECIFIED FOR HALOGEN FREE/ LOW HALOGEN) ISSUED BY PEGATRON. 5. CUT LINE. Notes paper A 4 BACK LABEL ZYXEL XMG3512 ZYXEL XMG3512 1510-23YQ000 Austin Shen Jack Chen Andy Chang Label Location - FCC ID: I88XMG3512-B10A

Zyxel Communications Corporation No.2 Industry East RD. IX, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu 30075, Taiwan Date: October 14, 2016 Subject: Ad Hoc Mode Function Declaration To Whom it may concern, We, Zyxel Communications Corporation declare that the device does not support any non-US channels and country code selection in all the operational mode(s) for the following product. FCC ID: I88XMG3512-B10A IC ID: 2468C-XMG3512B10A Regards, Emma Bao / Manager Zyxel Communications Corporation Tel: 886 3 578-3942 # 88582 E-mail: Emma.bao@zyxel.com.tw

Zyxel Communications Corporation No.2 Industry East RD. IX, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu 30075, Taiwan Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 Date: October 14, 2016 Subject: FCC Application for FCC ID: I88XMG3512-B10A To Whom it may concern, We, the undersigned, would like to declare that the composite portion catagorized as computer peripheral has been authorized under the Declaration of Conformity procedures, which the report issued from International Certification Corp..(report number: FD651003) Emma Bao / Manager Zyxel Communications Corporation Tel: 886 3 578-3942 # 88582 E-mail: Emma.bao@zyxel.com.tw

Zyxel Communications Corporation No.2 Industry East RD. IX, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu 30075, Taiwan Date: 2016/10/14 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 Subject: Product Certification Representative Authorization Letter FCC ID: I88XMG3512-B10A Product name: Dual-Band Wireless AC/N VDSL2 Bonding Gateway with USB To whom it may concern:

We the undersigned, hereby authorize following person to act as our agent in the preparation of an application for equipment authorization of model XMG3512-B10A to the FCC Rules and Regulations. International Certification Corp. Address Name Job Title e-mail

: No.3-1, Lane 6, Wen San 3rd St. Kwei Shan Dist., TaoYuan City 333, Taiwan (R.O.C.)

: Gary Chang

: Manager

: garychang@icertifi.com.tw Webs We further certifies that neither the applicant nor any party to this application, as defined in 47 CFR Ch. 1.2002(b), is subject to a denial to Federal benefits, that include FCC benefits, pursuant to section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1998, 21 U.S.C. 862. This appointment also includes the authority to complete FCC Form 731 on our behalf and sign the application as an authorized agent. Emma Bao / Manager Zyxel Communications Corporation Tel: 886 3 578-3942 # 88582 E-mail: Emma.bao@zyxel.com.tw

Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 Subject: Request for confidentiality FCC ID: I88XMG3512-B10A Date: October 14, 2016 To whom it may concern:

Short-term confidentiality Pursuant to DA 04-1705 of the Commissions pubic notice, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47CFR 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachments until 180 days after issue date. Internal Photographs External Photographs User's manual Test Set up photo Permanent confidentiality Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, the Applicant Hereby requests confidential treatment of information accompanying this Application As outlined below:

Block Diagram Schematics Operational Description Bill of Materials Tune up procedure The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these materials may be harmful to the applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The applicant understands that pursuant to Section 0.457 of the Rules, disclosure of this application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application. Should you require any further information, please contact the undersigned. Thank you for your consideration in this matter. Emma Bao / Manager Zyxel Communications Corporation Tel: 886 3 578-3942 # 88582 E-mail: Emma.bao@zyxel.com.tw